WO2024021755A1 - Backlight module, display device, and backlight control method - Google Patents

Backlight module, display device, and backlight control method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024021755A1
WO2024021755A1 PCT/CN2023/093002 CN2023093002W WO2024021755A1 WO 2024021755 A1 WO2024021755 A1 WO 2024021755A1 CN 2023093002 W CN2023093002 W CN 2023093002W WO 2024021755 A1 WO2024021755 A1 WO 2024021755A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
light
control signal
backlight control
observer
emitting device
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/093002
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
余洋
谢月飞
李慧玲
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2024021755A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024021755A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B30/00Optical systems or apparatus for producing three-dimensional [3D] effects, e.g. stereoscopic images
    • G02B30/20Optical systems or apparatus for producing three-dimensional [3D] effects, e.g. stereoscopic images by providing first and second parallax images to an observer's left and right eyes
    • G02B30/26Optical systems or apparatus for producing three-dimensional [3D] effects, e.g. stereoscopic images by providing first and second parallax images to an observer's left and right eyes of the autostereoscopic type
    • G02B30/33Optical systems or apparatus for producing three-dimensional [3D] effects, e.g. stereoscopic images by providing first and second parallax images to an observer's left and right eyes of the autostereoscopic type involving directional light or back-light sources
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • G02F1/1336Illuminating devices
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • G02F1/1336Illuminating devices
    • G02F1/133602Direct backlight
    • G02F1/133603Direct backlight with LEDs
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/20Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
    • G09G3/34Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source
    • G09G3/36Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source using liquid crystals

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of light display technology, and in particular to a backlight module, a display device and a backlight control method.
  • the backlight module includes a light panel.
  • the light panel is provided with multiple light-emitting devices distributed in an array. One or more of the multiple light-emitting devices The light-emitting device is turned on, and the turned-on light-emitting device emits light to generate a light beam, and the light beam is transmitted to the display panel.
  • the display panel receives the image frame, and driven by the image frame, the display panel displays the image.
  • the light beams required for the two adjacent image frames may be different, so it is necessary to control the different light-emitting devices in the backlight module to turn on to generate different light beams.
  • the backlight module is usually controlled first to turn on the light-emitting device corresponding to the previous image frame among the two adjacent image frames. Turn off, and then control to turn on the light-emitting device corresponding to the latter of the two adjacent image frames, and the control complexity is high.
  • the two adjacent image frames are often the left eye image frame and the right eye image frame, and there is a need between the left eye image frame and the right eye image frame.
  • Fast switching makes the control complexity of existing backlight modules higher.
  • This application provides a backlight module, a display device and a backlight control method.
  • the backlight module is used in a display device.
  • the control complexity of the backlight module is lower than that of the existing backlight module.
  • a backlight module for use in a display device.
  • the backlight module includes a plurality of light-emitting devices and a driving circuit connected to the plurality of light-emitting devices; the driving circuit is used to obtain the first backlight of the first image frame.
  • control signal, and a second backlight control signal of the second image frame wherein the first backlight control signal includes a switching signal corresponding to each light-emitting device in the plurality of light-emitting devices, and the second image frame is the previous one of the first image frame.
  • the second backlight control signal includes a switching signal corresponding to each light-emitting device in the plurality of light-emitting devices; switching the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to a different switching signal in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal.
  • the first backlight control signal is the backlight control signal of the first image frame
  • the second backlight control signal is the backlight control signal of the second image frame
  • the second image frame is the backlight control signal of the first image frame.
  • the previous image frame, and the driving circuit can obtain the first backlight control signal, or can compare the first backlight control signal with the second backlight control signal, and determine the difference between the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal in turn.
  • This one or more different switching signals are the light-emitting devices that need to be switched on and off based on the light-on states of all the light-emitting devices corresponding to the second image frame, and these After the switching state of the light-emitting device that needs to be switched is switched, it is the light-on state of all the light-emitting devices corresponding to the first image frame. Therefore, the driving circuit switches the switching state of the light-emitting devices corresponding to one or more different switching signals according to one or more different switching signals, so that when switching between two adjacent image frames, there is no need to first switch all the light-emitting devices All are turned off, and then the corresponding light-emitting device is turned on.
  • the first image frame is a left eye image frame
  • the switch state corresponding to the first backlight control signal is that the light emitting device is turned on to generate a first beam, and the first beam is transmitted to the left eye
  • the second image frame is a right eye image frame.
  • the switch state corresponding to the second backlight control signal is that the light-emitting device that is turned on generates a second beam, and the second beam is transmitted to the right eye; or, the first image frame is a right eye image frame, and the switch state corresponding to the first backlight control signal is The light-emitting device that is turned on generates a first light beam, and the first light beam is transmitted to the right eye; the second image frame is an image frame for the left eye, and the switch state corresponding to the second backlight control signal is that the light-emitting device that is turned on generates a second light beam, and the second light beam is transmitted to the left eye.
  • the backlight module is a backlight module in directional backlight technology.
  • the image frame switching method is left eye image frame, right eye image frame, left eye image frame, right eye image Frame... Therefore, the two adjacent image frames can be that the first image frame is a left eye image frame, the second image frame is a right eye image frame, and the switch state of the multiple light emitting devices corresponding to the first backlight control signal is on.
  • the device generates a first light beam, and the first light beam is transmitted to the left eye, and the light-emitting device whose switch state is on among the plurality of light-emitting devices corresponding to the second backlight control signal generates a second light beam, and the second light beam is transmitted to the right eye; or the first image
  • the frame is a right-eye image frame
  • the second image frame is a left-eye image frame
  • the light-emitting device whose switch state is on among the plurality of light-emitting devices corresponding to the first backlight control signal generates a first light beam
  • the first light beam is transmitted to the right eye
  • the first light beam is transmitted to the right eye.
  • the light-emitting device whose switch state is on generates a second light beam, and the second light beam is transmitted to the left eye.
  • the backlight control signals of dozens of adjacent image frames or even hundreds of image frames are closely related, and the switching speed is very fast, then according to the first backlight control signal of the first image frame Compare the signal with the second backlight control signal of the second image frame, find a switch signal in the first backlight control signal of the first image frame that is different from the second backlight control signal of the second image frame, and switch the first backlight control signal
  • the switch state of the light-emitting device corresponds to the different switch signal in the second backlight control signal.
  • the driving circuit is also used to read the second backlight control signal in the cache.
  • the second backlight control signal is the backlight control signal of the second image frame
  • the second image frame is the previous image frame of the first image frame, where the backlight control signal of the previous image frame is often retained. in the cache, so the second backlight control signal can be read from the cache.
  • the driving circuit is specifically configured to simultaneously switch the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal under the control of the clock signal, or switch in a predetermined order.
  • the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, the predetermined sequence includes: row-by-row switching and column-by-column switching.
  • the switching state of at least one light-emitting device corresponding to the switching signal can be switched simultaneously under the control of a clock signal, so that the light-emitting devices corresponding to each image frame that need to be turned on are turned on at the same time; it can also be done under the control of a clock signal.
  • the switching mode of the display panel is row-by-row switching
  • the driving circuit in the backlight module also switches the switching state of at least one light-emitting device corresponding to the switching signal row by row under the control of the clock signal; it can also be the switching mode of the display panel.
  • the driving circuit in the backlight module When switching column by column, the driving circuit in the backlight module also switches the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to at least one switch signal column by column under the control of the clock signal. That is to say, the driving circuit drives and switches the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to at least one switching signal, and can change following the switching mode of the display panel, thereby achieving the effect of the light following the screen.
  • the driving circuit is also used to determine the different switches in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal. Signal.
  • the driving circuit is specifically configured to perform an XOR operation on the switching states corresponding to the switching signals of the same light-emitting device in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal; and determine the first backlight control signal according to the result of the XOR operation. Whether the switching signal of the same light-emitting device in the backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal are the same.
  • the switch state corresponding to the switch signal of any light-emitting device is on or off.
  • the switch state is on and can be represented by a binary "1”
  • the switch state is off can be represented by a binary "0"
  • the switch state corresponding to the switching signals of the same light-emitting device in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal If the switch states corresponding to the switch signals of the same light-emitting device in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal are different, the result of the XOR operation is "0". The result is "1". Therefore, the first backlight can be determined based on the result of the Whether the switching signal of the same light-emitting device in the control signal and the second backlight control signal are the same.
  • a second aspect provides a display device, including a display panel and a backlight module as described in any one of the above first aspects.
  • the light-emitting device in the backlight module generates a light beam and transmits it to the display panel, so that the first image frame Drives the display panel to display images.
  • the display device also includes: an optical module located between the backlight module and the display panel; the optical module is used to transmit the light beam corresponding to the first backlight control signal generated by the light-emitting device in the backlight module through the display panel. to the left eye, transmitting the light beam corresponding to the second backlight control signal generated by the light-emitting device in the backlight module to the right eye through the display panel; or; the optical module is used to transmit the light beam generated by the light-emitting device in the backlight module corresponding to the first The light beam of the backlight control signal is transmitted to the right eye through the display panel, and the light beam corresponding to the second backlight control signal generated by the light-emitting device in the backlight module is transmitted to the left eye through the display panel.
  • an optical module located between the backlight module and the display panel
  • the optical module is used to transmit the light beam corresponding to the first backlight control signal generated by the light-emitting device in the backlight module through the display panel. to the left eye, transmitting the light beam
  • the display device is a display device using directional backlight technology.
  • the optical module mainly transmits the light beam generated by the light-emitting device in the backlight module to the left side of the observer in a directional manner. eye, or directed transmission to the observer's right eye.
  • the display device also includes a human eye detection device, the human eye detection device has a field of view; a human eye detection device, used to detect the human eye position of the first observer, and generate the third human eye position according to the first observer's human eye position.
  • a backlight control signal the first observer's human eye is the first observer's left eye or right eye, the first observer's human eye position is determined by the angle of the first observer's human eye in the field of view, and the third The distance between an observer's human eyes and the display panel is determined.
  • the directional backlight technology needs to transmit the light beam directionally to the left eye of the observer, or transmit the light beam directionally to the right eye of the observer, it can be seen that the position of the observer's eyes needs to be obtained in order to The directional light beam is transmitted, in which the human eye of the first observer can be the left eye of the first observer or the right eye of the first observer, and the position of the human eye of the first observer can be the left eye of the first observer. The position of the eye or the position of the first observer's right eye.
  • the position of the first observer's human eye is determined by the angle of the first observer's human eye in the field of view of the human eye detection device, and the first observer's human eye position. The distance between the eye and the display panel in the display device is determined.
  • a switching signal corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting devices that has a mapping relationship with the position of the first observer's left eye can be generated, that is, the first backlight control is generated signal, and then transmit the first backlight control signal to the driving circuit in the backlight module; or, after determining the position of the observer's right eye, multiple light-emitting devices that have a mapping relationship with the position of the observer's right eye can be generated
  • the switching signal corresponding to each light-emitting device is used to generate a first backlight control signal, and then the first backlight control signal is transmitted to the driving circuit in the backlight module.
  • the display device also includes a human eye detection device, the human eye detection device has a field of view; a human eye detection device, used to detect the human eye position of the first observer, and generate the third human eye position according to the first observer's human eye position.
  • a sub-backlight control signal the human eye of the first observer is the left eye or right eye of the first observer, and the position of the human eye of the first observer is determined by the human eye of the first observer.
  • the angle in the field angle and the distance between the first observer's human eyes and the display panel are determined; the human eye detection device is also used to detect the position of the second observer's human eyes, and generate the third observer based on the second observer's human eye position.
  • the second observer's human eye is the second observer's left eye or right eye
  • the second observer's human eye position is determined by the angle of the second observer's human eye in the field of view, and The distance between the human eyes of the second observer and the display panel is determined;
  • the human eye detection device is also used to generate a first backlight control signal according to the first sub-backlight control signal and the second sub-backlight control signal.
  • the first observer's human eye may be the first observer's left eye or the first observer's right eye
  • the first observer's human eye position may be the first observer's left eye.
  • the position of the observer's left eye determines a plurality of light-emitting devices that have a mapping relationship with the position of the first observer's left eye (or the position of the first observer's eye).
  • the switching signal corresponding to each light-emitting device generates a first sub-backlight control signal; the human eye of the second observer can be the left eye of the second observer or the right eye of the second observer.
  • the eye position may be the position of the second observer's left eye or the position of the second observer's right eye, then the human eye position of the second observer is the position of the second observer's left eye (or the position of the second observer's right eye).
  • the position of the second observer's right eye the position of the second observer's left eye (or the position of the second observer's right eye) is determined based on the position of the second observer's left eye (or the position of the second observer's right eye).
  • the first backlight control signal includes both the switching signal of the light-emitting device required to be turned on in the first sub-backlight control signal and the switching signal of the light-emitting device required to be turned on in the second sub-backlight control signal. Under the control of the first backlight control signal, the light-emitting device required to be turned on in the first sub-backlight control signal turns on to emit light and generates a light beam.
  • the light-emitting device required to be turned on in the second sub-backlight control signal turns on to emit light and generates a light beam.
  • the light beam will be transmitted to
  • the optical module changes the propagation direction of the light-emitting device required to be turned on in the first sub-backlight control signal to point toward the left eye of the first observer (or the right eye of the first observer), and transmits it to display panel, and then transmitted to the left eye of the first observer (or the right eye of the first observer); the optical module changes the direction of propagation of the light-emitting device required to be turned on in the second sub-backlight control signal to turn on the light generated by the light beam.
  • the left eye of the second observer (or the right eye of the second observer) is transmitted to the display panel, and then transmitted to the left eye of the second observer (or the right eye of the second observer); the display panel receives the first observation
  • the display panel displays the image frame of the first observer's left eye (or the first observer's right eye) driven by the image frame of the first observer's left eye (or the first observer's right eye).
  • the left eye image (or the first observer's right eye image), the first observer's left eye (or the first observer's right eye) views the first observer's left eye image (or the first observer's right eye image) eye image); the display panel receives the image frame of the second observer's left eye (or the second observer's right eye), and the image frame of the second observer's left eye (or the second observer's right eye)
  • the display panel is driven to display the left eye image of the second observer (or the right eye image of the second observer), and the left eye of the second observer (or the right eye of the second observer) receives the left eye image of the second observer. image (or the second observer's right eye image).
  • two different left-eye images or two different right-eye images of different people can be displayed.
  • the display device also includes a control circuit, the control circuit is connected to the display panel, and the control circuit is connected to the drive circuit in the backlight module; the control circuit is used to compare the first image frame with the second image frame to determine whether the display panel At least one pixel group in, wherein, within each pixel group in at least one pixel group, the difference between the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the first image frame and the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the second image frame Greater than a predetermined value; it is also used to obtain the first backlight control signal corresponding to each pixel group in at least one pixel group.
  • the difference between the number of assigned pixels corresponding to the first image frame and the number of assigned pixels corresponding to the second image frame is greater than a predetermined value, indicating that the pixel group The effect of the 3D image displayed inside is more prominent.
  • the 3D image displays out-of-screen and in-screen A pixel group corresponding to the effect, then, when controlling multiple light-emitting devices, you can only obtain the first backlight control signal of the area corresponding to each pixel group in one or more pixel groups with a relatively prominent effect of the 3D image, so as to When displaying a 3D image, the driving circuit only needs to compare the backlight control signals of the light-emitting devices in the area corresponding to the pixel group with a more prominent effect in the 3D image. The number of light-emitting devices controlled will be reduced again, and the control efficiency will be improved again.
  • a backlight control method is provided, which is applied to a display device.
  • the display device includes a backlight module, and the backlight module includes a plurality of light-emitting devices; the method includes: acquiring a first backlight control signal of the first image frame, and a third The second backlight control signal of the two image frames, wherein the first backlight control signal includes a switching signal corresponding to each light-emitting device in the plurality of light-emitting devices; the second image frame is the previous image frame of the first image frame, and the second image frame is the previous image frame of the first image frame.
  • the backlight control signal includes a switching signal corresponding to each light-emitting device in the plurality of light-emitting devices; switching the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to a different switching signal in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal.
  • the first image frame is a left eye image frame
  • the switch state corresponding to the first backlight control signal is that the light emitting device is turned on to generate a first beam, and the first beam is transmitted to the left eye
  • the second image frame is a right eye image frame.
  • the switch state corresponding to the second backlight control signal is that the light-emitting device that is turned on generates a second beam, and the second beam is transmitted to the right eye; or, the first image frame is a right eye image frame, and the switch state corresponding to the first backlight control signal is The light-emitting device that is turned on generates a first light beam, and the first light beam is transmitted to the right eye; the second image frame is an image frame for the left eye, and the switch state corresponding to the second backlight control signal is that the light-emitting device that is turned on generates a second light beam, and the second light beam is transmitted to the left eye.
  • the first backlight control signal of the first image frame and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame it also includes: detecting the human eye position of the first observer, and The eye position generates the first backlight control signal.
  • the human eye of the first observer is the left eye or the right eye of the first observer.
  • the human eye position of the first observer is determined by the human eye of the first observer in the field of view.
  • the angle and the distance between the human eye of the first observer and the display panel in the display device are determined, where the field of view angle is the field of view angle of the human eye detection device in the display device.
  • the first backlight control signal of the first image frame and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame it also includes: detecting the human eye position of the first observer, and The eye position generates the first sub-backlight control signal.
  • the human eye of the first observer is the left eye or right eye of the first observer.
  • the human eye position of the first observer is determined by the human eye of the first observer in the field of view.
  • the angle and the distance between the human eyes of the first observer and the display panel in the display device are determined, wherein the field of view angle is the field of view angle of the human eye detection device in the display device; detecting the human eye of the second observer
  • the second sub-backlight control signal is generated according to the eye position of the second observer.
  • the human eye of the second observer is the left eye or the right eye of the second observer.
  • the human eye position of the second observer is determined by the second eye position.
  • the angle of the observer's human eyes in the field of view and the distance between the second observer's human eyes and the display panel in the display device are determined; the first backlight is generated according to the first sub-backlight control signal and the second sub-backlight control signal control signal.
  • obtaining the first backlight control signal of the first image frame and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame also includes: comparing the first image frame with the second image frame to determine whether At least one pixel group in the display panel, wherein in each pixel group in the at least one pixel group, the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the first image frame and the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the second image frame The difference in quantity is greater than a predetermined value; obtaining the first backlight control signal of the first image frame and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame specifically includes obtaining the first image frame corresponding to each pixel group in at least one pixel group.
  • the first backlight control signal, and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame corresponding to each pixel group in at least one pixel group.
  • the method before acquiring the first backlight control signal of the first image frame and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame, the method further includes: reading the second backlight control signal in the cache.
  • switch the light emitter corresponding to the different switch signal in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal specifically includes: under the control of a clock signal, simultaneously switching the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, or switching the first backlight control signal in a predetermined sequence.
  • the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, the predetermined sequence includes: row-by-row switching and column-by-column switching.
  • the second backlight control signal of the second image frame after acquiring the first backlight control signal of the first image frame and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame, it further includes: determining a switch signal in the first backlight control signal that is different from the second backlight control signal. .
  • determining the switch signal in the first backlight control signal that is different from the switch signal in the second backlight control signal specifically includes: switching the switch corresponding to the switch signal of the same light-emitting device in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal.
  • An XOR operation is performed on the status; according to the result of the XOR operation, it is determined whether the switching signal of the same light-emitting device in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal is the same.
  • a fourth aspect provides a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer-readable storage medium includes computer instructions. When the computer instructions are run on a computer, they cause the computer to execute the backlight control method as described in any one of the above-mentioned third aspects.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a display device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 2 is a schematic structural diagram of a display panel and a backlight module in a display device according to an embodiment of the present application
  • Figure 3 is a schematic structural diagram of a light panel in a backlight module in a display panel according to an embodiment of the present application
  • Figure 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a backlight module provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 5 is a schematic structural diagram of a light-emitting device in a backlight module provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • Figure 6 is a schematic diagram of the principle of directional backlight technology provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 7 is a schematic diagram 1 of the human eye recognition principle of pointing backlight technology provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 8 is a second schematic diagram of the human eye recognition principle of pointing backlight technology provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 9 is a schematic diagram of the principle of directional backlight technology provided by yet another embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a display device provided by yet another embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a pixel group of a display panel provided by yet another embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a light-emitting device group of a backlight module provided by yet another embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 13 is a schematic flowchart of a backlight control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic flowchart of a backlight control method provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • An item (item) can represent: a, b, c, a and b, a and c, b and c or a, b and c, where a, b and c can be single or multiple.
  • words such as “first” and “second” do not limit the number and order.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a display device 10 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the display device 10 may be an advertising screen (billboard), a monitor, a 3D display, a television (such as a smart screen), a laptop, a tablet, a vehicle-mounted device, or other large-screen display device.
  • the display device 10 may be a mobile phone, an e-reader, or a wearable device.
  • the display device 10 shown in FIG. 1 is explained using a display as an example.
  • the display device 10 may include a housing 11 and a display panel 22 .
  • FIG. 1 shows only an example of the display device 10, and this example does not limit the structure of the display device 10.
  • the display device 10 may also include more structures or components.
  • the housing 11 may include a frame and a back cover.
  • the frame can surround the periphery of the back cover.
  • the housing 11 may include, for example, a middle frame of the display device 10 .
  • the middle frame of the display device 10 may be accommodated within the inner periphery of the frame.
  • the middle frame of the display device 10 may serve as a border of the housing 11 .
  • the display panel 22 may provide a display function for the display device 10 .
  • the user can watch the display panel 22 to enjoy media resources such as images and videos.
  • the display panel 22 can be installed on the housing 11 .
  • the peripheral edge of the display panel 22 may abut against the inner edge of the frame.
  • the frame can fix the display panel 22 on the housing 11 .
  • the display panel 22 and the back cover can be installed on both sides of the frame respectively, so that the housing 11 can provide mechanical protection for the components inside the display device, especially the components on the display panel 22 .
  • the display panel 22 may be fixed on the middle frame of the display device 10 .
  • Display device 10 may also include control circuitry.
  • Specific implementation forms of the control circuit may include, for example, a processor, a controller, a connector, a drive board, an integrated circuit, a chip, a power board, etc.
  • the control circuit can be accommodated in the housing 11 .
  • the control circuit may include at least one communication interface, a bus, at least one processor, and at least one memory. At least one communication interface, at least one processor and at least one memory can communicate with each other via a bus. At least one communication interface can be used to receive and send signals.
  • the light-emitting device of the display panel 22 can be connected to one of the communication interfaces, so that the control circuit can trigger the light-emitting device to turn on and emit light.
  • At least one memory is used to store application code.
  • the application code may include, for example, code that controls the light emitting device to turn on or off to emit light.
  • At least one processor can be used to execute the above application code to control the light-emitting device.
  • "at least one" includes, for example, one or more of both situations.
  • a backlight module is also provided on one of the display panels 22 close to the back cover of the display device.
  • FIG. 2 shows the backlight module 21 and the display panel 22 provided on the light exit side of the backlight module 21 .
  • the backlight module 21 may include a stacked back plate 211, a flat plate 212, a light plate 213, a diffusion plate 214, an optical film 215 and other components.
  • the above figure 2 only provides an exemplary general structure of the backlight module 21.
  • the backlight module 21 There may be more or fewer components than listed above.
  • the backplane 211 may have functions such as supporting the display device 10 and providing mechanical protection for electronic components in the display device 10 .
  • the material of the back plate 211 can be a material that meets mechanical strength requirements and can play a supporting role.
  • the back plate 211 may be made of metal materials such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, zinc alloy, or titanium alloy, or the back plate 211 may be made of non-metal materials such as resin.
  • the flat plate 212 may be located between the light panel 213 and the back panel 211 .
  • the flat plate 212 can be used to provide support for the light panel 213 to maintain or ensure the flatness of the light panel 213.
  • the flat plate 212 may be a conductive material with certain stiffness.
  • the flat plate 212 may be an aluminum plate.
  • the flat plate 212 can be fixed on the back plate 211 through mechanical connectors such as double-sided tape or foam.
  • the optical film 215 can change the frequency of light from the light panel 213.
  • Optical film 215 may include quantum dots.
  • the lamp panel 213 can emit high-energy blue light; the blue light can excite the quantum dots encapsulated in the optical film 215, so that the quantum dots can convert the blue light emitted by the lamp panel 213 into white light (the quantum dot can be a nano-scale Semiconductor; by applying a certain electric field or light pressure to the quantum dots, the quantum dots can emit light of a specific frequency).
  • Quantum dots can be formed in chemical coatings, phosphors, etc., for example.
  • the diffusion plate 214 may include quantum dots, so the diffusion plate 214 may change the frequency of light from the light panel 213 .
  • the diffusion plate 214 may be integrally formed with the optical film 215 . The light emitted by the lamp panel 213 may only undergo light mixing processing without other optical processing, and directly enter the diffusion plate 214 .
  • the display panel 22 may be a liquid crystal display (LCD).
  • the display panel 22 may include a liquid crystal layer and a filter layer.
  • the display panel 22 is also called a liquid crystal panel.
  • the liquid crystal in the liquid crystal layer can control the liquid crystal unit to turn on or off to control the intensity of white light passing through the liquid crystal unit.
  • the white light passing through the liquid crystal unit can illuminate the filter layer.
  • the filter layer may include a red light filter, a green light filter, and a blue light filter. Red light filters can be used to convert white light to red light. Green light filters can be used to convert white light into green light.
  • Blue light filters can be used to convert white light to blue light.
  • the display device 10 can be controlled to emit light of multiple colors to display color patterns.
  • a predetermined number of liquid crystal units form a pixel, and a pixel value can be assigned to each pixel so that the current pixel displays different colors.
  • the pixel value can be the gray value of the current pixel or the red color of the current pixel.
  • the light panel 213 may be provided with a plurality of light-emitting devices L arranged in an array.
  • the light-emitting device L may be a chip with a light-emitting function, or the light-emitting device L may be a light-emitting diode (LED).
  • the light board 213 also includes a driving circuit connected to a plurality of light-emitting devices. The driving circuit is used to Obtain a backlight control signal including multiple switch signals. The multiple switch signals in the backlight control signal are used to control the switch states of multiple light-emitting devices provided on the light panel 213.
  • the switch state corresponding to the switch signal is binary "1" ", it means that the light-emitting device is controlled to be turned on and the light-emitting device emits light; when the switch state corresponding to the switch signal is binary "0", the light-emitting device is controlled to be turned off and the light-emitting device does not emit light.
  • the driving circuit controls the light-emitting device L whose switch state is binary "1" corresponding to the switch signal according to the backlight control signal to turn on the light, that is, the turned-on light-emitting device L generates a light beam.
  • the light beam will be used to represent the light emitted by the light-emitting device. of light, wherein the light beam generated by the turned-on light-emitting device L will be transmitted to the display panel 22 .
  • the display panel 22 also receives image frames, which are also image signals. Each image frame corresponds to a backlight control signal.
  • the image frame may be an image frame generated by the processor in the display device 10 .
  • the control circuit is transmitted to the display panel 22.
  • the image frame is used to control the opening or closing of the liquid crystal unit on the display panel 22. That is, the image frame is used to control the pixel value of the pixel point on the display panel 22. Therefore, during the driving of the image frame down, the display panel displays image.
  • the two adjacent image frames are transmitted to the display panel 22 respectively, and the light beams required for the two adjacent image frames also need to be transmitted to the display panel respectively.
  • the light beams required for two adjacent image frames may be different, so it is necessary to control the different light-emitting devices in the backlight module to turn on to generate different light beams.
  • the backlight module is usually first controlled to turn on the light-emitting device corresponding to the previous image frame among the two adjacent image frames. First turn it off, and then control to turn on the light-emitting device corresponding to the latter of the two adjacent image frames.
  • the control complexity is high, and it often traverses the switching status of all the light-emitting devices, and then turns it off and on. Light-emitting devices, when the number of light-emitting devices on the light board increases, the control delay will also increase.
  • 3D technology is based on the principle of visual difference of the observer's eyes, and uses certain optical technology to enable the observer to observe 3D images.
  • 3D technology is divided into two categories: glasses-type 3D technology and naked-eye 3D technology.
  • Glasses-type 3D technology mainly enables the observer to wear lenses with different polarization states for the left and right eyes, thereby allowing the observer's left and right eyes to receive different images. The purpose of observing 3D images.
  • the advantage of naked-eye 3D technology is that it does not require the use of glasses.
  • directional backlight technology in naked-eye 3D technology has attracted much attention.
  • the left eye image is often displayed first, and then the right eye image is displayed. If the display time of the left eye image and the right eye image is The interval is relatively small.
  • the observer's left eye receives the left eye image, and the observer's right eye receives the right eye image.
  • the observer's eyes are equivalent to receiving the left eye image and the right eye image at the same time, and There is parallax information between the left eye image and the right eye image received by the observer.
  • the observer fuses the left eye image and the right eye image in his brain, then performs depth reconstruction, and finally stereoscopic imaging, so that the observer can view the stereoscopic image. image.
  • the previous image frame of the two adjacent image frames displayed in the directional backlight technology corresponds to the left eye image frame, and the latter of the two adjacent image frames is displayed.
  • the image frame corresponds to the right eye image frame.
  • Two adjacent image frames are transmitted to the display panel respectively, and the light beams required for the two adjacent image frames also need to be transmitted to the display panel respectively.
  • the light beams required for two adjacent image frames are different, so it is necessary to control the different light-emitting devices in the backlight module to turn on to generate different light beams.
  • the backlight module is the one shown in Figure 2 and the light board included in the backlight module is provided with a light-emitting device 1, a light-emitting device 2, a light-emitting device 3 and a light-emitting device 4, the left eye image corresponding to
  • the light-emitting devices that need to be turned on include light-emitting device 1, light-emitting device 2 and light-emitting device 3.
  • the light-emitting devices that need to be turned on to display the right eye image include light-emitting device 2, light-emitting device 3 and light-emitting device 4.
  • the backlight module is often controlled to first turn off the light-emitting device 1, the light-emitting device 2 and the light-emitting device 3 on the lamp board, and then turn off the light-emitting device 2, the light-emitting device 3 and the light-emitting device 4 on the lamp board.
  • the backlight module is often controlled to first turn off the light-emitting device 1, the light-emitting device 2 and the light-emitting device 3 on the lamp board, and then turn off the light-emitting device 2, the light-emitting device 3 and the light-emitting device 4 on the lamp board.
  • the backlight module is often controlled to first turn off the light-emitting device 1, the light-emitting device 2 and the light-emitting device 3 on the lamp board, and then turn off the light-emitting device 2, the light-emitting device 3 and the light-emitting device 4 on the lamp board.
  • a backlight module 40 is applied to a display device.
  • the backlight module 40 includes a plurality of light-emitting devices (such as the light-emitting device L1 , the light-emitting device L2 , the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 shown in FIG. 4 ) and multiple light-emitting devices.
  • a driving circuit 42 connected to a light-emitting device.
  • multiple light-emitting devices are often arranged on the lamp panel 41 and are distributed in an array on the lamp panel 41.
  • the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L2 are located in the same row, and the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 are located in the same row.
  • the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L3 are located in the same column, and the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L4 are located in the same column.
  • the light-emitting device may be a chip with a light-emitting function, or the light-emitting device may be an LED.
  • the light-emitting device is an LED.
  • any light-emitting device can be a single LED.
  • the light-emitting device L1 includes an LED.
  • the switching state corresponding to the switching signal received by the light-emitting device L1 When the binary value is "1", the LED is turned on to emit light.
  • the switch state corresponding to the switch signal received by the light-emitting device L1 is the binary value "0”, the LED is turned off and does not emit light.
  • any light-emitting device can be a string of LEDs.
  • the light-emitting device L1 includes a string of 4 LEDs.
  • the switching state corresponding to the switching signal received by the light-emitting device L1 is a binary value. 1", the four LEDs are all turned on and emit light. When the switch state corresponding to the switch signal received by the light-emitting device L1 is the binary value "0", the four LEDs are all turned off and do not emit light.
  • any light-emitting device can be a set of LEDs distributed in an array. Referring to (c) in Figure 5, the light-emitting device L1 includes a 2*2 array of LEDs. The switch corresponding to the switch signal received by the light-emitting device L1 When the state is a binary value "1", the LEDs distributed in the 2*2 array are all turned on and emit light.
  • the LEDs distributed in the 2*2 array All are closed and do not emit light.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the number of LEDs included in the light-emitting device and the arrangement of the LEDs.
  • the switch state corresponding to the switch signal received by the light-emitting device L1 when the switch state corresponding to the switch signal received by the light-emitting device L1 is a binary value "0", the light-emitting device L1 turns on to emit light, and when the switch state corresponding to the switch signal received by the light-emitting device L1 When it is a binary value "1", the light-emitting device L1 is turned off and does not emit light.
  • the switch state corresponding to the switch signal received by the light-emitting device L1 is a binary value "10"
  • the light-emitting device L1 turns on to emit light
  • the switch state corresponding to the switch signal received by the light-emitting device L1 is a binary value "01”
  • the light-emitting device L1 is turned off and does not emit light.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific representation form of the switch state corresponding to the switch signal.
  • the switch state corresponding to the switch signal received by the light-emitting device L1 is a binary value "1"
  • the light-emitting device L1 When the light-emitting device L1 is turned on and the switch state corresponding to the switch signal received by the light-emitting device L1 is a binary value "0”, the light-emitting device L1 is turned off and does not emit light for the purpose of illustration.
  • the driving circuit 42 is used to obtain the first backlight control signal of the first image frame and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame.
  • the first backlight control signal includes a signal corresponding to each light-emitting device in the plurality of light-emitting devices.
  • switching signal, the second image frame is the previous image frame of the first image frame, the second backlight control signal includes a switching signal corresponding to each light-emitting device in the plurality of light-emitting devices; switching the first backlight control signal and the second backlight
  • the switching states of the light-emitting devices correspond to different switching signals in the control signal.
  • one switching signal correspondingly controls the switching state of one light-emitting device.
  • the two adjacent image frames are the first image frame and the second image frame, and the second image frame is the previous image frame of the first image frame.
  • the driving circuit 42 in the backlight module 40 needs to obtain the first backlight control signal of the first image frame, and the driving circuit 42 controls the light emission corresponding to the first image frame according to the first backlight control signal.
  • the switching state of the device so that the light-emitting device whose switching state is on emits light.
  • the multiple light-emitting devices in Figure 4 are described by taking four light-emitting devices as an example.
  • the first backlight signal includes a switching signal corresponding to each of the four light-emitting devices, and, When displaying the image corresponding to the first image frame, the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L4 need to be turned on, and the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L3 need to be turned off.
  • the matrix B (0,1,0,1)
  • the third element "0" corresponds to the light-emitting device L3, indicating that the light-emitting device L3 is turned off when displaying the image corresponding to the first image frame;
  • the first backlight control signal includes the switching signal of each of the plurality of light-emitting devices, and the order of the switching signals in the first backlight control signal is consistent with the order of the plurality of light-emitting devices arranged on the lamp panel 41 . Depends on the order.
  • the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to the four switching signals included in the first backlight control signal can also be represented by a 2*2 matrix, for example Among them, matrix The element “0" in the first row and first column corresponds to the light-emitting device L1, matrix The element “1” in the first row and second column corresponds to the light-emitting device L2, matrix The element “0” in the second row and first column corresponds to the light-emitting device L3, matrix The element “1" in the second row and second column corresponds to the light-emitting device L4.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the representation form of the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to the multiple switching signals in the first backlight control signal.
  • the first backlight control signal includes the switching states of the multiple light-emitting devices.
  • the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L4 need to be turned on, and the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L3 need to be turned off.
  • the second backlight control signal also includes the switching states "1", “1", “0", and "0" corresponding to the switching signals of the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3, and the light-emitting device L4.
  • the second backlight control signal includes a switching signal corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting devices, and the order of the switching signals in the second backlight control signal is consistent with that of each of the plurality of light-emitting devices. It depends on the order on the light board. More specifically, in the embodiment of the present application, the light-emitting device corresponding to the n-th switch signal in the first backlight control signal and the n-th switch signal in the second backlight control signal is the same, n ⁇ [1,4] .
  • the driving circuit 42 acquires the second backlight control signal of the second image frame. Specifically, in the display device where the backlight module 40 is applied, the backlight control signal of the second image frame will be retained in the cache of the memory of the display device. Therefore, the driving circuit 42 can read the second backlight control signal from the cache.
  • the driving circuit 42 After the driving circuit 42 acquires the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, optionally, the driving circuit determines a different switch signal in the first backlight control signal and in the second backlight control signal.
  • the elements in matrix A represent the switching states of the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 in order from left to right.
  • matrix A and matrix B different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal can be determined.
  • the different switching signals are the switching signals corresponding to the light-emitting device L1 and the switching signals corresponding to the light-emitting device L4.
  • the driving circuit 42 determines the switching signals in the first backlight control signal that are different from the switching signals in the second backlight control signal, which may be that the driving circuit 42 determines the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to the four switching signals in the first backlight control signal.
  • the switching status corresponding to the switching signal of the light-emitting device is XORed. According to the XORed As a result, it is determined whether the switching signal of the same light-emitting device in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal is the same.
  • the result of the XOR operation is "0", which means the same, and the result of the XOR operation is "1", which means they are different. That is to say, the first element "0" in matrix B performs an XOR operation with the first element "1" in matrix A.
  • the result of the XOR operation is "1", which means that the first backlight control signal and the second The switching signal corresponding to the light-emitting device L1 in the backlight control signal is different; the second element “1” in matrix B performs an XOR operation with the second element "1” in matrix A, and the result of the XOR operation is "0" It means that the switching signal corresponding to the light-emitting device L2 in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal is the same; the third element “0” in matrix B performs an XOR operation with the third element "0” in matrix A, The result of the XOR operation is "0", which means that the switching signal corresponding to the light-emitting device L3 in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal are the same; the fourth element "1" in matrix B is the same as the fourth element "1" in matrix A.
  • the element "0" performs an XOR operation, and the result of the XOR operation is "1" indicating that the switching signals corresponding to the light-emitting device L4 in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal are different. Therefore, it is also possible to determine different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and in the second backlight control signal, and the different switching signals are the switching signals corresponding to the light-emitting device L1 and the switching signals corresponding to the light-emitting device L4.
  • the driving circuit 42 is used to switch the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, wherein in determining the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal,
  • the different switching signals are the switching signal corresponding to the light-emitting device L1 and the switching signal corresponding to the light-emitting device L4.
  • the driving circuit 42 will switch the switching state of the light-emitting device L1, specifically changing the switching state of the light-emitting device L1 from on to off.
  • the driving circuit 42 also switches the switching state of the light-emitting device L4, specifically changing the switching state of the light-emitting device L4 from off to on.
  • the driving circuit 42 is specifically configured to simultaneously switch the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal under the control of the clock signal, or switch in a predetermined sequence.
  • the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, the predetermined sequence includes: row-by-row switching and column-by-column switching.
  • the driving circuit 42 simultaneously switches the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal under the control of the clock signal, so that the switches corresponding to the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L2 The state is switched to turn on the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L4, and to turn off the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L3.
  • the switching mode of the display panel is line-by-line switching, for example, when switching line-by-line in order from top to bottom
  • the driving circuit 42 also switches the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal line-by-line under the control of the clock signal.
  • Different switching signals in the two backlight control signals correspond to the switching status of the light-emitting device, that is, first switch the switching status of the light-emitting device L1 so that the light-emitting device L2 in the first row from top to bottom is turned on, and the light-emitting device L1 is turned off, and then Switch the switching state of the light-emitting device L4 so that the light-emitting device L4 in the second row from top to bottom is turned on and the light-emitting device L3 is turned off.
  • the driving circuit 42 when the switching mode of the display panel is column-by-column switching, for example, when switching column-by-column in order from left to right, the driving circuit 42 also switches the first backlight control signal and the first backlight control signal column-by-column under the control of the clock signal.
  • Different switching signals in the two backlight control signals correspond to the switching status of the light-emitting device, that is, first switch the switching status of the light-emitting device L1 so that the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L3 in the first column from left to right are both turned off, and then Switch the switch state of the light-emitting device L4 so that both the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L4 in the second row from left to right are turned on.
  • the driving circuit drives and switches the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, and can change according to the switching mode of the display panel, achieving the effect of the light following the screen.
  • the driving circuit can obtain the first backlight control signal of the first image frame and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame, and the second image frame is the previous one of the first image frame.
  • image frame after the driving circuit obtains the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, the driving circuit can switch the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to the different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal.
  • the switching signal in the first backlight control signal that is different from the second backlight control signal is the basis of the switching states of all light-emitting devices corresponding to the second image frame.
  • the light-emitting devices that need to be switched on and off are switched, and the switching states of these light-emitting devices that need to be switched on and off are the switching states of all the light-emitting devices corresponding to the first image frame. Therefore, the driving circuit switches the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, so that when switching between two adjacent image frames, there is no need to switch all the light-emitting devices first.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a display device 100 corresponding to directional backlight technology.
  • the display device 100 includes a backlight module 40 and a display panel 22 , and also includes a backlight module 40 and a display panel 22 .
  • the optical module 60 is between the display panel 22 and the display panel 22 .
  • the optical module 60 includes a Fresnel lens, a cylindrical lens, etc., and is used to change the direction of the light emitted through the optical module 60 .
  • the optical module 60 uses The light beam generated by the light-emitting device in the backlight module 40 is transmitted through the display panel 22 to the left eye e1 of the first observer or the right eye e2 of the first observer.
  • the switching method of image frames is left eye image frame, right eye image frame, left eye image frame, right eye image frame..., then, the backlight module 40 in the display device 100, its backlight control
  • the signal switching method is the backlight control signal of the left eye image frame, the backlight control signal of the right eye image frame, the backlight control signal of the left eye image frame, the backlight control signal of the right eye image frame...
  • the first image frame may be a left-eye image frame
  • the first backlight control signal is the backlight control signal of the left-eye image frame
  • the switch state corresponding to the first backlight control signal is that the light-emitting device that is turned on generates the first light beam, and the first light beam Transmitted to the left eye
  • the second image frame may be a right eye image frame
  • the second backlight control signal is the backlight control signal of the right eye image frame
  • the switch state corresponding to the second backlight control signal is that the light-emitting device that is turned on generates the second light beam
  • the second beam is transmitted to the left eye.
  • the first image frame may be a right-eye image frame
  • the first backlight control signal is the backlight control signal of the right-eye image frame.
  • the switch state corresponding to the first backlight control signal is that the light-emitting device that is turned on generates the first light beam.
  • the second image frame can be the left eye image frame
  • the second backlight control signal is the backlight control signal of the left eye image frame
  • the switch state corresponding to the second backlight control signal is that the light-emitting device that is turned on generates the second light beam
  • the second beam is transmitted to the left eye.
  • the observer in Figure 6 is a first observer, the first observer's left eye e1 receives the left eye image, and the first observer's right eye e2 receives the right eye image.
  • the three adjacent frames are the right eye image frame, the left eye image frame, and the right eye image frame, and the corresponding three adjacent backlight control signals are the backlight control of the right eye image frame.
  • Signal 0 backlight control signal 1 of the left eye image frame, and backlight control signal 2 of the right eye image frame. That is to say, the driving circuit 42 in the backlight module 40 in the display device 100 obtains the backlight control signal 1 and the backlight control signal 0.
  • the backlight control signal 1 includes the switching signal corresponding to each light-emitting device in the plurality of light-emitting devices,
  • the backlight control signal 0 includes a switching signal corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting devices; switching the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to a different switching signal in the backlight control signal 1 is switched.
  • the light-emitting device whose switch state is on among the plurality of light-emitting devices corresponding to the backlight control signal 1 generates the light beam 1 , and the light beam 1 is transmitted to the optical module 60 .
  • the optical module 60 is used to change the propagation direction of the light beam 1, for example, change the propagation direction of the light beam 1 to point to the left eye e1 of the first observer, transmit it to the display panel 22, and then transmit it to the right eye e2 of the first observer. , that is to say, the optical module 60 transmits the light beam 1 corresponding to the backlight control signal 1 generated by the light-emitting device in the backlight module 40 to the left eye e1 of the first observer through the display panel 22 .
  • the display panel 22 is used to receive the left eye image frame when the optical module 60 changes the propagation direction of the light beam 1 to point to the left eye e1 of the first observer.
  • the display panel 22 displays the left eye image frame driven by the left eye image frame. image so that the left eye e1 of the first observer receives the left eye image.
  • the driving circuit 42 in the backlight module 40 in the display device 100 obtains the backlight control signal 2, and the backlight
  • the control signal 1 and the backlight control signal 2 include a switching signal corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting devices.
  • the backlight control signal 1 includes a switching signal corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting devices; switching the backlight control signal 2
  • the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to different switching signals in the backlight control signal 1.
  • the light-emitting device whose switch state is on among the plurality of light-emitting devices corresponding to the backlight control signal 2 generates the light beam 2 , and the light beam 2 is transmitted to the optical module 60 .
  • the optical module 60 is used to change the propagation direction of the light beam 2, for example, change the propagation direction of the light beam 2 to point toward the right eye e2 of the first observer, transmit it to the display panel 22, and then transmit it to the right eye e2 of the first observer. , that is to say, the optical module 60 transmits the light beam 2 corresponding to the backlight control signal 2 generated by the light-emitting device in the backlight module 40 to the right eye e2 of the first observer through the display panel 22 .
  • the display panel 22 is used to receive the right eye image frame when the optical module 60 changes the propagation direction of the light beam 2 to point to the right eye e2 of the first observer.
  • the display panel 22 displays the right eye image frame driven by the right eye image frame. image so that the right eye e2 of the first observer receives the right eye image.
  • the observer's left eye receives the left eye image
  • the observer's right eye receives the right eye image.
  • the observer's eyes are equivalent to simultaneously The left eye image and the right eye image are received, and there is disparity information between the left eye image and the right eye image received by the observer.
  • the observer performs image fusion on the left eye image and the right eye image in his brain, and then performs depth reconstruction. , and finally stereoscopic imaging, allowing the observer to view a stereoscopic image.
  • the backlight control signals of dozens of adjacent image frames or even hundreds of image frames are closely related, and the switching speed is very fast, then according to the first backlight control signal of the first image frame and Compare the second backlight control signal of the second image frame, and switch the switch state of the light-emitting device corresponding to the different switch signal in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal.
  • the number of light-emitting devices in the state is reduced, so the switching speed will be faster, and it will not easily cause the problem of light-emitting devices flickering in a short time, improving control efficiency.
  • the human eye detection device includes one or more cameras arranged on the display panel 22.
  • the human eye detection device is arranged in the middle of the display panel 22.
  • the human eye detection device may be a binocular camera.
  • the human eye detection device may be a binocular camera.
  • the detection device has a field of view; the human eye detection device is used to detect the human eye position of the first observer, and generate the first backlight control signal according to the human eye position of the first observer, and the human eye of the first observer is the first
  • the observer's left eye or right eye, the first observer's human eye position is determined by the angle of the first observer's human eye in the field of view, and the first observer's human eye and the display panel 22 in the display device 100 The distance is determined.
  • the human eye detection device 44 is disposed in the middle of the display panel 22 .
  • the human eye detection device 44 detects the position of the first observer's human eyes, and the human eye detection device 44 itself does not rotate.
  • the human eye of the first observer may be the left eye e1 of the first observer or the right eye e2 of the first observer.
  • the position of the human eye of the first observer is the position of the left eye e1 of the first observer or the first human eye of the first observer.
  • the human eye detection device 44 When the human eye detection device 44 detects the position of the first observer's left eye e1, the human eye detection device 44 emits light in a predetermined direction to detect the first observer's left eye.
  • the distance between e1 and the display panel 22 is s1.
  • the predetermined direction forms an angle ⁇ with the angular bisector of the field of view ⁇ of the human eye detection device 44, and the angular bisector of the field of view ⁇ of the human eye detection device 44 is in contact with the display panel.
  • the angle between 22 is ⁇ . Then, based on the above-mentioned distance s1 and the difference of ⁇ - ⁇ , the vertical distance between the first observer's left eye e1 and the display panel 22 can be calculated.
  • the position of the first observer's right eye e2 is measured in a similar manner as above, and, in order to ensure the accuracy of the detection, the position of the first observer's left eye e1 is often detected within a short period of time.
  • the position of the observer's right eye e2 for example, take an image of the first observer and then measure the position of the first observer's left eye e1 in the image of the first observer.
  • the position is the same as the position of the first observer's right eye e2.
  • the human eye detection device 44 is disposed in the middle of the display panel 22 .
  • the human eye detection device 44 detects the position of the first observer's human eyes, and the human eye detection device 44 rotates.
  • the first observer's human eye may be the first observer's left eye e1 or the first observer's right eye e2
  • the first observer's human eye position may be the position of the first observer's left eye e1 or the first observer's right eye e2.
  • the human eye detection device 44 When the human eye detection device 44 detects the position of the first observer's left eye e1, the human eye detection device 44 emits light in a predetermined direction and measures the distance of the observer's left eye e1.
  • the distance between the display panel 22 is s1, and the predetermined direction is the direction of the angular bisector of the visual field angle ⁇ of the human eye detection device, that is, the human eye detection device 44 rotates the angular bisector of the visual field angle ⁇ to point to the first observation
  • the angle bisector of the viewing angle ⁇ of the human eye detection device 44 and the display panel is ⁇ . Then, based on the difference between the above distance s1 and ⁇ , the vertical distance between the first observer's left eye e1 and the display panel 22 can be calculated.
  • the position of the first observer's right eye e2 is measured in a similar manner as above.
  • the camera in the human eye detection device 44 can be a binocular camera or two monocular cameras.
  • the binocular camera or two monocular cameras refer to the content in the prior art and will not be described again here.
  • the light panel in the backlight module 40 is provided with four light-emitting devices as shown in FIG. 4 , namely the light-emitting device L1 , the light-emitting device L2 , the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 , wherein the first observer
  • the position of the human eye may be the position of the first observer's left eye e1, and there is a mapping relationship between the position of the first observer's left eye e1 and the turning on of the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L2, and the turning off of the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4,
  • two observers may watch the 3D image at the same time, where the first observer's left eye e1 and right eye e2 and the second observer's left eye e3 and right eye e4 , when two observers watch a 3D image at the same time, the left eye image of the first observer, the right eye image of the first observer, the left eye image of the second observer, and the left eye image of the second observer can be displayed as follows.
  • the right eye image of the first observer, the left eye image of the first observer, the right eye image of the first observer, the left eye image of the second observer, the right eye image of the second observer ... in turn make each observation Viewers can view 3D images.
  • the human eye detection device detects the position of the human eye of the first observer.
  • the human eye of the first observer may be the left eye e1 of the first observer or the right eye e2 of the first observer.
  • the human eye of the first observer The position may be the position of the first observer's left eye e1 or the position of the first observer's right eye e2.
  • the human eye detection device also detects the position of the second observer's human eye.
  • the second observer's human eye may be the position of the first observer's right eye e2.
  • the left eye e3 of the second observer or the right eye e4 of the second observer may be the position of the left eye e3 of the second observer or the position of the right eye e4 of the second observer.
  • the backlight control signal corresponding to the position of the first observer's left eye e1 is the first backlight control signal
  • the backlight control signal corresponding to the position of the first observer's right eye e2 is the second backlight control signal.
  • the backlight control signal corresponding to the position of the observer's left eye e3 is the third backlight control signal
  • the backlight control signal corresponding to the position of the second observer's right eye e4 is the fourth backlight control signal
  • the refresh method of the backlight control signal is the first backlight control signal, the second backlight control signal, the third backlight control signal, and the fourth backlight control signal.
  • the refresh method of the image frames is the left eye image frame of the first observer, the right eye image frame of the first observer, the left eye image frame of the second observer, and the right eye image frame of the second observer.
  • the backlight refresh rate and image refresh rate when two observers watch a 3D image are twice as fast as when one observer watches a 3D image.
  • the left eye image of the first observer and the left eye image of the second observer, the right eye image of the first observer and the right eye image of the second observer can be displayed as follows.
  • the left eye image of one observer and the left eye image of the second observer, the right eye image of the first observer and the right eye image of the second observer ... enable each observer to see a 3D image.
  • Figure 9 includes a first observer and a second observer.
  • the first observer's left eye e1 receives the left eye image
  • the first observer's right eye e2 receives the right eye image
  • the second observer's left eye e1 receives the left eye image
  • Eye e3 receives the left eye image
  • the second observer's right eye e4 receives the right eye image.
  • the three adjacent frames are the right eye image frame of the first observer and the right eye image frame of the second observer, the left eye image frame of the first observer and the left eye image frame of the second observer, and the first observation frame.
  • the right eye image frame of the first observer and the right eye image frame of the second observer, and the corresponding three adjacent backlight control signals are the right eye image frame of the first observer and the right eye image frame of the second observer.
  • the backlight control signal 4, the backlight control signal 5 common to the left eye image frame of the first observer and the left eye image frame of the second observer, the right eye image frame of the first observer and the right eye image of the second observer Frame common backlight control signal 6.
  • the backlight control signals corresponding to the two image frames are the same.
  • the human eye detection device When it is necessary to display the left eye image of the first observer and the left eye image of the second observer, the human eye detection device is used to detect the human eye position of the first observer, and generate a child according to the human eye position of the first observer.
  • Backlight control signal 51 the first observer's human eye is the first observer's left eye or right eye
  • the first observer's human eye position is determined by the first observer's human eye in the field of view of the human eye detection device
  • the angle and the distance between the human eyes of the first observer and the display panel in the display device are determined.
  • the human eye position of the first observer may be the position of the first observer's left eye e1.
  • the sub-backlight control signal 51 is generated according to the position of the first observer's left eye e1, where the first observer's left eye There is a predetermined mapping relationship between the position of the eye e1 and the switching signal corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting devices.
  • the light panel in the backlight module 40 is provided with four light-emitting devices as shown in FIG.
  • the human eye detection device is also used to detect the human eye position of the second observer, and generate the sub-backlight control signal 52 according to the human eye position of the second observer.
  • the human eye of the second observer is the left eye or the left eye of the second observer.
  • the right eye, the human eye position of the second observer is determined by the angle of the second observer's human eye in the field of view of the human eye detection device, and the distance between the second observer's human eye and the display panel in the display device , where the human eye position of the second observer may be the position of the second observer's left eye e3, then the sub-backlight control signal 52 is generated according to the position of the second observer's left eye e3, where the second observer's left eye e3 There is a predetermined mapping relationship between the position of the eye e3 and the switching signal corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting devices.
  • the light panel in the backlight module 40 is provided with four light-emitting devices as shown in FIG.
  • the human eye detection device is also configured to generate a backlight control signal 5 common to the left eye image frame of the first observer and the left eye image frame of the second observer based on the sub-backlight control signal 51 and the sub-backlight control signal 52 .
  • sub-backlight control signal 51 In the sub-backlight control signal 52, the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L2 are turned on, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 are turned off, the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L3 are turned on, and the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L4 are turned off.
  • the backlight control signal 5 the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L3 are turned on, and the light-emitting device L4 is turned off.
  • the driving circuit 42 is used to obtain the backlight control signal 5 and the backlight control signal 4.
  • the backlight control signal 5 includes a switching signal corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting devices.
  • the backlight control signal 4 includes a switch signal corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting devices.
  • a switching signal corresponding to a light-emitting device switching the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to a different switching signal in the backlight control signal 5 in the backlight control signal 5, so that the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L3 emit light to generate a light beam.
  • the light beam is transmitted to optical module 60.
  • the optical module 60 can change the propagation direction of the light beam generated by the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L2 in the backlight module 40 to point toward the left eye e1 of the first observer, transmit it to the display panel 22 , and then transmit it to the first observer.
  • the optical module 60 can change the propagation direction of the light beam generated by the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L3 in the backlight module 40 to point to the left eye e3 of the second observer, and transmit it to the display panel 22, and then transmit it To the second observer's left eye e3.
  • the display panel 22 receives the left eye image frame of the first observer. Driven by the left eye image frame of the first observer, the display panel 22 displays the left eye image of the first observer and also receives the left eye image of the second observer.
  • the display panel 22 displays the left eye image of the second observer, so that the left eye e1 of the first observer views the left eye image of the first observer , the second observer's left eye e3 views the second observer's left eye image.
  • the human eye position of the first observer may also be the position of the first observer's right eye e2.
  • the sub-backlight control signal 61 is generated, and 4 of the sub-backlight control signal 61 is generated.
  • the human eye position of the second observer can also be the position of the second observer's right eye e4.
  • the sub-backlight control signal 62 is generated.
  • the human eye detection device is also used to generate the backlight control signal 6 according to the sub-backlight control signal 61 and the sub-backlight control signal 62 .
  • the sub-backlight control signal 61 the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L3 are turned on, and the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L4 are turned off.
  • the sub-backlight control signal 62 the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 are turned on, and the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L2 are turned off.
  • the backlight control signal 6 the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 are turned on, and the light-emitting device L1 is turned off.
  • the driving circuit 42 is used to obtain the backlight control signal 6 and the backlight control signal 5.
  • the backlight control signal 6 includes a switching signal corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting devices
  • the backlight control signal 5 includes a switch signal corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting devices.
  • a switching signal corresponding to a light-emitting device switching the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to a different switching signal in the backlight control signal 5 in the backlight control signal 6, because in the backlight control signal 5, the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L3
  • the light-emitting device L4 is turned on, the light-emitting device L4 is turned off.
  • the switching state of the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L4 is switched, so that the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 emit light to generate a light beam, which is transmitted to the optical module 60 .
  • the optical module 60 can change the propagation direction of the light beam generated by the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L3 in the backlight module 40 to point toward the right eye e2 of the first observer, and transmit it to the display panel 22 and then to the first observer.
  • the optical module 60 can change the propagation direction of the light beam generated by the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 in the backlight module 40 to point to the right eye e4 of the second observer, transmit it to the display panel 22, and then transmit it to the display panel 22.
  • the display panel 22 receives the right eye image frame of the first observer. Driven by the right eye image frame of the first observer, the display panel 22 displays the right eye image of the first observer and also receives the right eye image of the second observer.
  • the display panel 22 displays the right eye image of the second observer driven by the right eye image frame of the second observer, so that the right eye e2 of the first observer views the right eye image of the first observer, The second observer's right eye e4 sees the second observer image of the right eye. Then, in one refresh process, two different left-eye images or two different right-eye images of different observers can be displayed.
  • the display device 100 includes a display panel 22 and a control circuit 70 , the control circuit 70 is connected to the display panel 22 , and the control circuit 70 is connected to the driving circuit 42 ; the control circuit 70 is used to control the first
  • the image frame is compared with the second image frame to determine at least one pixel group in the display panel, wherein in each pixel group of the at least one pixel group, the assigned pixel point corresponding to the first image frame and the second image
  • the difference between the assigned pixel points corresponding to the frame is greater than a predetermined value; it is also used to obtain the first backlight control signal corresponding to each pixel group in at least one pixel group.
  • the display device 100 further includes a memory.
  • the control circuit 70 is connected to the memory.
  • the control circuit 70 is also connected to a human eye detection device.
  • the human eye detection device transmits the detected human eye position of the first observer to the control circuit 70 .
  • the control circuit 70 searches the memory for a switching signal corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting devices that has a mapping relationship with the current eye position of the first observer in the memory, and generates a backlight control
  • the signal is transmitted to the driving circuit 42 in the backlight module 40, or the control circuit 70 calculates according to the human eye position of the first observer, among the multiple light-emitting devices that have a mapping relationship with the current human eye position of the first observer.
  • the switching signal corresponding to each light-emitting device is used to generate a backlight control signal and transmit it to the driving circuit 42 in the backlight module 40 .
  • the control circuit 70 may also obtain the first backlight control signal of the first image frame and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame, where the first backlight control signal includes a plurality of light-emitting devices.
  • the control circuit 70 determines The different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal are transmitted to the driving circuit 42 , and the driving circuit 42 is used to switch the first backlight control signal.
  • the display panel 22 includes 128*128 array distributed pixel points, wherein the array distributed pixel points are divided into 4*4
  • Each pixel group includes 32*32 pixels.
  • the order from top to bottom is the first row of pixel groups, the second row of pixel groups, and the third row of pixels. group and the fourth row of pixel groups. From left to right in each row of pixel groups are the first column of pixel groups, the second column of pixel groups, the third column of pixel groups and the fourth column of pixel groups.
  • the first image frame and the second image frame are two adjacent image frames, and the second image frame is the previous image frame of the first image frame.
  • the control circuit 70 When displaying the image corresponding to the first image frame, the control circuit 70 obtains the first image frame. For example, the number of pixel points assigned in the 4-column pixel group of the first row corresponding to the first image frame are 543, 766, 852, 19, the number of pixels assigned in the 4-column pixel group in the second row are 765, 109, 654, 98 respectively, and the number of pixels assigned in the 4-column pixel group in the third row are respectively 900, 124, 876, 582. The numbers of pixels assigned in the 4-column pixel group of the fourth row are 988, 187, 234, and 199 respectively.
  • the control circuit 70 obtains the second image frame.
  • the numbers of pixel points assigned to the 4-column pixel group of the first row of the second image frame are 599, 966, 768, 30.
  • the number of pixels assigned in the 4-column pixel group in the second row are 865, 200, 740, and 376 respectively.
  • the number of pixels assigned in the 4-column pixel group in the third row are 876, 212, 890, 600, the number of pixels assigned in the 4-column pixel group of the fourth row are 1000, 224, 890, and 100 respectively.
  • control circuit 70 compares the difference between the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the first image frame and the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the second image frame in the 4-column pixel group of the first row, which are 56 and 200 respectively. , 84, 11; The control circuit 70 compares the difference between the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the first image frame and the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the second image frame in the 4-column pixel group of the second row.
  • control circuit 70 compares the 4-column pixel group of the third row , the differences between the number of assigned pixels corresponding to the first image frame and the number of assigned pixels corresponding to the second image frame are 24, 88, 14, and 18 respectively; the control circuit 70 compares the 4 in the fourth row In the column pixel group, the differences between the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the first image frame and the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the second image frame are 12, 37, 656, and 99 respectively.
  • the control circuit 70 determines that in a pixel group, the difference between the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the first image frame and the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the second image frame is greater than a predetermined value.
  • the value can be 10% of the total number of pixels in the pixel group, that is, 32*32*10% ⁇ 102, indicating the number of pixels assigned to the current pixel group when displaying the first image frame and the second image frame. If the difference is relatively large, then the pixel group may be a pixel group with outstanding 3D effect, or it may be a pixel group corresponding to the out-of-screen and in-screen effects in the 3D image.
  • the difference between the number of assigned pixels corresponding to the first image frame and the number of assigned pixels corresponding to the second image frame is less than a predetermined value, indicating that the current pixel group is displaying the first image frame.
  • the number of assigned pixels is not much different, and the 3D effect is not prominent.
  • the predetermined value may be 10% of the total number of pixels in the pixel group, or it may be 20% of the total number of pixels in the pixel group. For example, when the refresh rate of the display panel becomes faster, the percentage will decrease. , the predetermined value also decreases. The embodiments of this application do not limit the predetermined value.
  • the control circuit 70 determines that when the current display panel displays the first image and the second image, at least one pixel group with outstanding 3D effect includes: the pixel group Z1 in the first row and second column, and the pixel group Z1 in the second row and fourth column. Group Z2, pixel group Z3 in the fourth row and third column.
  • control circuit 70 when the control circuit 70 divides the pixels in the display panel 22 into multiple pixel groups, the control circuit 70 also divides the multiple light-emitting devices in the backlight module 40 into multiple light-emitting device groups, and One pixel group in the display panel 22 corresponds to a group of light-emitting device groups in the backlight module 40 .
  • the pixel group Z1 in the first row and second column of the display panel 22 corresponds to the light-emitting device group H1 in the backlight module 40
  • the pixel group Z2 in the second row and fourth column of the display panel 22 corresponds to the backlight module 40
  • the light-emitting device group H2, the pixel group Z3 in the fourth row and third column of the display panel 22 corresponds to the light-emitting device group H3 in the backlight module 40.
  • the light-emitting device group corresponding to the pixel group containing 32*32 pixels can have 32*32 light-emitting devices, that is, each light-emitting device corresponds to one pixel, or the light-emitting device group can have 16*16 light-emitting devices.
  • each light-emitting device corresponds to four pixels.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the number of pixels corresponding to one light-emitting device.
  • the control circuit 70 is also used to obtain the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H1 corresponding to the pixel group Z1, and transmit the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H1 to the driving circuit 42; and obtain the luminescence signal corresponding to the pixel group Z2.
  • the first backlight control signal of the device group H2 is transmitted to the driving circuit 42; the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H3 corresponding to the pixel group Z3 is obtained, and the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H3 is obtained.
  • the first backlight control signal is transmitted to the driving circuit 42 .
  • the driving circuit 42 is specifically used to obtain the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H1 corresponding to the pixel group Z1 and the second backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H1, and the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H2 corresponding to the pixel group Z2. and the second backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H2, the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H3 corresponding to the pixel group Z3, and the second backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H3, wherein the first backlight control signal is the first The backlight control signal of the image frame is the backlight control signal of the second image frame.
  • the driving circuit 42 compares the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H1 with the second backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H1, and determines whether the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H1 is consistent with the light-emitting device group H1.
  • Different switching signals in the second backlight control signal combine the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H2 and the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H2
  • the second backlight control signal is compared to determine the switch signal in the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H2 and the second backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H2; the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H3 and the lighting
  • the second backlight control signal of the device group H3 is compared to determine the switch signal in the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H3 and the second backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H3.
  • the driving circuit 42 switches the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H1 and the second backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H1, and switches the first backlight control of the light-emitting device group H2
  • the switching state of the light-emitting device in the signal corresponds to a different switching signal in the second backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H2, switching the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H3 and the second backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H3
  • Different switching signals correspond to the switching states of the light-emitting device.
  • the driving circuit In order to realize that every time the backlight control signal is switched, the driving circuit only needs to compare the backlight control signals of the light-emitting devices in the area corresponding to the pixel group with a more prominent 3D image effect. The number of controlled light-emitting devices will be reduced again, and the control efficiency will be reduced again. will be promoted again.
  • embodiments of the present application also provide a backlight control method, which is applied to a display device.
  • the backlight module may be the backlight module 40 shown in FIG. 4 , and the backlight module includes A light panel is provided with a plurality of light-emitting devices distributed in an array.
  • Backlight control methods include:
  • the first backlight control signal includes a switching signal corresponding to each light-emitting device in the plurality of light-emitting devices, and one switching signal correspondingly controls the switching state of one light-emitting device.
  • the multiple light-emitting devices in FIG. 4 are described by taking four light-emitting devices as an example.
  • the first backlight signal includes a switching signal corresponding to each of the four light-emitting devices.
  • the elements in ,0,1) represent the switching states of the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 in order from left to right.
  • the second backlight control signal is Backlight control signal for the second image frame.
  • the second backlight control signal includes switching states “1”, “1”, “0”, and “0” respectively corresponding to the switching signals of the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3, and the light-emitting device L4.
  • the backlight control signal of the previous image frame of the image frame to be displayed will be retained in the cache of the memory of the display device. Therefore, the second backlight control signal can be read from the cache. .
  • the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to the different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal can be switched.
  • the first backlight control signal The switch signals in the signal that are different from the second backlight control signal are the switch signals corresponding to the light-emitting device L1 and the switch signals corresponding to the light-emitting device L4. Then, switching the switch state of the light-emitting device L1 is specifically changing the switch state of the light-emitting device L1 by On to off, switching the switch state of the light-emitting device L4, specifically changing the switch state of the light-emitting device L4 from off turns on.
  • the method further includes: determining a switch signal in the first backlight control signal that is different from the second backlight control signal.
  • the switching states of the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 are shown in sequence;
  • the different switching signals are the switching signals corresponding to the light-emitting device L1 and the switching signals corresponding to the light-emitting device L4.
  • the result of the XOR operation is "0", which means the same, and the result of the XOR operation is "1", which means they are different. That is to say, the first element "0" in matrix B performs an XOR operation with the first element "1" in matrix A.
  • the result of the XOR operation is "1", which means that the first backlight control signal and the second The switching signal corresponding to the light-emitting device L1 in the backlight control signal is different; the second element “1” in matrix B performs an XOR operation with the second element "1” in matrix A, and the result of the XOR operation is "0" It means that the switching signal corresponding to the light-emitting device L2 in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal is the same; the third element “0” in matrix B performs an XOR operation with the third element "0” in matrix A, The result of the XOR operation is "0", which means that the switching signal corresponding to the light-emitting device L3 in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal are the same; the fourth element "1” in matrix B is the same as the fourth element "1” in matrix A.
  • the element “0” performs an XOR operation, and the result of the XOR operation is "1" indicating that the
  • the switch signals in the first backlight control signal that are different from the switch signals in the second backlight control signal are the switch signals corresponding to the light-emitting device L1 and the switch signals corresponding to the light-emitting device L4. Then, in S102, the switch of the light-emitting device L1 is switched. state, specifically changing the switching state of the light-emitting device L1 from on to off, switching the switching state of the light-emitting device L4, specifically changing the switching state of the light-emitting device L4 from off to on.
  • the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal can be switched simultaneously, or switching in a predetermined sequence.
  • the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, the predetermined sequence includes: row-by-row switching and column-by-column switching.
  • the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal are simultaneously switched, so that the switching states corresponding to the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L2 are switched,
  • the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L4 are turned on, and the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L3 are turned off.
  • the switching method of the display panel in the display device is row-by-row switching, for example, when switching row by row in order from top to bottom, under the control of the clock signal, the first backlight control signal and the switching mode are also switched row by row.
  • Different switching signals in the second backlight control signal correspond to the switching status of the light-emitting device, that is, first switching the switching status of the light-emitting device L1 so that the light-emitting device L2 in the first row from top to bottom is turned on and the light-emitting device L1 is turned off. Then switch the switching state of the light-emitting device L4 so that the light-emitting device L4 in the second row from top to bottom is turned on and the light-emitting device L3 is turned off. Or when the display panel in the display device switches column by column, for example, when switching column by column in order from left to right, under the control of the clock signal, the first backlight control signal and the switching method are also switched column by column.
  • Different switching signal pairs in the second backlight control signal The corresponding switch state of the light-emitting device, that is, first switch the switch state of the light-emitting device L1 so that the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L3 in the first column from left to right are both turned off, and then switch the switch state of the light-emitting device L4 so that Both the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L4 in the second row from left to right are turned on.
  • the driving circuit drives and switches the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, and can change according to the switching mode of the display panel, achieving the effect of the light following the screen.
  • the above-mentioned backlight control method may specifically be a backlight control method used for backlight modules in backlight technology.
  • the image frame switching method in the directional backlight technology is left eye image frame, right eye image frame, left eye image frame, right eye image frame... cycle.
  • the backlight control method used by the backlight module in the directional backlight technology includes:
  • the human eye of the first observer may be the left eye of the first observer or the right eye of the first observer
  • the human eye position of the first observer may be the position of the left eye of the first observer or the first observation
  • the position of the first observer's human eye is determined by the angle of the first observer's human eye in the field of view and the distance between the first observer's human eye and the display panel in the display device.
  • the first backlight control signal generated in step S201 is the first backlight control signal of the first image frame.
  • the first image frame can specifically be the left eye image frame of the first observer. Subsequently, the first image needs to be acquired.
  • the second image frame is the previous image frame of the first image frame.
  • the backlight control method further includes: determining a switch signal that is different in the first backlight control signal and a second backlight control signal.
  • the switch signal that is different in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal corresponds to When switching between two adjacent image frames, it is necessary to switch the light-emitting device in the light-on state.
  • the switch state of the light-emitting device corresponding to the different switch signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal can be switched, for example, it is necessary to The switch state of the light-emitting device that switches the switch state changes from on to off, or the switch state of the light-emitting device that needs to switch the switch state changes from off to on.
  • the switch signals in the first backlight control signal that are different from the switch signals in the second backlight control signal are the light-emitting devices that need to switch the switch state based on the switch states of all the light-emitting devices corresponding to the second image frame, and these needs After the switching state of the light-emitting device that switches the switching state is switched, it is the switching state of all the light-emitting devices corresponding to the first image frame.
  • the switching state is often under the control of a clock signal, switching the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal at the same time, or switching the first backlight control signal in a predetermined order.
  • the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, the predetermined sequence includes: row-by-row switching and column-by-column switching.
  • the light-emitting device then emits light to generate a light beam, which is transmitted to the optical module in the display device.
  • the optical module changes the direction of the light beam and transmits it to the display panel in the display device.
  • the light-emitting device whose switch state corresponds to the first backlight control signal is turned on generates the first light beam, and the first light beam is transmitted to the left eye of the first observer through the optical module in the display device, wherein the display panel receives the first light beam.
  • An image frame that is, the left eye image frame of the first observer.
  • the display panel in the display device displays the left eye image of the first observer, so that the left eye image of the first observer View the left eye image.
  • the first observer's right eye image needs to be displayed, where the first observer's human eye can be the first observer's left eye or the first observer's The right eye of the first observer, the human eye position of the first observer can be the position of the first observer's left eye or the position of the first observer's right eye, and the human eye position of the first observer is determined by the first observer's human eye position.
  • the angle in the field of view and the distance between the human eye of the first observer and the display panel in the display device are determined.
  • the position of the human eye of the first observer is specifically the right eye of the first observer.
  • the position of the first observer's left eye and the position of the first observer's right eye may be detected in step S201. Then in step S204, it only needs to be based on the position of the first observer's right eye.
  • the third backlight control signal is generated at the position of the right eye. The embodiments of the present application do not limit this.
  • the third backlight control signal generated in step S204 is the third backlight control signal of the third image frame.
  • the third image frame is specifically the right eye image frame of the first observer, and the left eye image of the first observer
  • the frame (first image frame) is the previous image frame of the first observer's right eye image frame (third image frame). Therefore, it is also necessary to obtain the third backlight control signal of the third image frame and the first image frame.
  • the first backlight control signal is also necessary to obtain the third backlight control signal of the third image frame and the first image frame.
  • the backlight control method further includes: determining a switch signal in the third backlight control signal that is different from the first backlight control signal, and the switch signal in the third backlight control signal that is different from the first backlight control signal corresponds to When switching between two adjacent image frames, it is necessary to switch the light-emitting device in the light-on state.
  • the switch state of at least one light-emitting device corresponding to the switch signal in the third backlight control signal that is different from the switch signal in the first backlight control signal can be switched, for example Change the switch state of the light-emitting device that needs to be switched from on to off, or change the switch state of the light-emitting device that needs to be switched from off to on.
  • the switch signals in the third backlight control signal that are different from the first backlight control signal are the light-emitting devices that need to switch the switch state based on the switch states of all the light-emitting devices corresponding to the first image frame, and these needs After the switching state of the light-emitting device that switches the switching state is switched, it is the switching state of all the light-emitting devices corresponding to the third image frame.
  • the switching state is often under the control of a clock signal, switching the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal in the third backlight control signal at the same time, or switching the third backlight control signal in a predetermined order.
  • the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to the different switching signals in the first backlight control signal in the backlight control signal is predetermined in sequence. The sequence includes: row-by-row switching and column-by-column switching.
  • the light-emitting device then emits light to generate a light beam, which is transmitted to the optical module in the display device.
  • the optical module changes the direction of the light beam and transmits it to the display panel in the display device.
  • the switch state corresponding to the third backlight control signal generates a third light beam for the turned-on light-emitting device, and the third light beam is transmitted to the right eye of the first observer through the optical module in the display device, wherein the display panel receives the third light beam.
  • Image frame that is, the right eye image frame of the first observer
  • the display panel in the display device displays the right eye image of the first observer, so that the right eye of the first observer watches to the right eye image.
  • the first observer When the first observer views the left eye image and the right eye image, the first observer can view the 3D stereoscopic image.
  • the left eye image of the first observer, the right eye image of the first observer, and the second observer's image can be displayed as follows.
  • Left eye image, second observer's right eye image, first observer's left eye image, first observer's right eye image, second observer's left eye image, second observer's The right eye image ... in turn enables each observer to view a 3D image.
  • Such a backlight control method is consistent with the backlight control method shown in FIG. 14 .
  • steps S201 to S206 are executed for the first time, they are the left eye image of the first observer and the right eye image of the first observer.
  • steps S201 to S206 are executed for the second time, When , it is the left eye image of the second observer and the right eye image of the second observer. Repeat this.
  • the left eye image of the second observer and the left eye image of the second observer, the right eye image of the first observer and the right eye image of the second observer ... make each observer see a 3D image.
  • S201 shown in Figure 14 includes:
  • the human eye of the first observer may be the left eye of the first observer or the right eye of the first observer
  • the human eye position of the first observer may be the position of the left eye of the first observer or the first observation
  • the position of the first observer's right eye is determined by the angle between the first observer's human eye in the field of view of the human eye detection device, and the angle between the first observer's human eye and the display in the display device.
  • the distance between panels is determined.
  • the first sub-backlight control signal is generated according to the left eye position of the first observer, where there is a predetermined mapping between the left eye position of the first observer and the switching signal corresponding to each light-emitting device in the plurality of light-emitting devices.
  • the light panel in the backlight module 40 is provided with four light-emitting devices as shown in FIG. 4 , namely the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4.
  • the first one is observed
  • the human eye of the second observer may be the left eye of the second observer or the right eye of the second observer
  • the human eye position of the second observer may be the left eye position of the second observer or the right eye of the second observer.
  • the position of the right eye of the second observer is determined by the angle of the second observer's human eye in the field of view of the human eye detection device, and the angle between the second observer's human eye and the display panel in the display device. The distance is determined.
  • the second sub-backlight control signal is generated according to the position of the second observer's left eye, where there is a predetermined relationship between the position of the second observer's left eye and the switch signal corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting devices.
  • the light board in the backlight module 40 is provided with four light-emitting lamps as shown in Figure 4
  • the devices are respectively the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4.
  • There is a mapping between the position of the second observer's left eye and the turning on of the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L3, and the turning off of the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L4. relationship, then the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to the four switching signals in the second sub-backlight control signal is B12 (0,1,1,0).
  • the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L2 are turned on, and the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 are turned off.
  • the second sub-backlight control signal the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L3 are turned on, and the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device are turned off.
  • L4 is turned off. Therefore, in the first backlight control signal, the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L3 are turned on, and the light-emitting device L4 is turned off.
  • step S204 shown in Figure 14 includes:
  • the human eye of the first observer may be the left eye of the first observer or the right eye of the first observer
  • the position of the human eye of the first observer may be the position of the left eye of the first observer or the position of the first observer's right eye.
  • the position of the right eye since the first sub-backlight control signal is generated based on the position of the first observer's left eye in step S201a, then in step S2204, the third sub-backlight is generated based on the position of the first observer's right eye.
  • the human eye of the second observer may be the left eye of the second observer or the right eye of the second observer, and the position of the human eye of the second observer may be the position of the left eye of the second observer or the position of the second observer's right eye.
  • the position of the right eye since the second sub-backlight control signal is generated based on the position of the second observer's left eye in step S201b, then in step S204b, the fourth sub-backlight is generated based on the position of the second observer's right eye.
  • the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L3 are turned on, and the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L4 are turned off.
  • the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 are turned on, and the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device are turned off.
  • L2 is turned off. Therefore, in the third backlight control signal, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 are turned on, and the light-emitting device L1 is turned off.
  • the first image frame may be compared with the second image frame to determine at least one pixel group in the display panel, wherein each pixel group in the at least one pixel group is different from the first image frame.
  • the difference between the corresponding assigned pixel point and the assigned pixel point corresponding to the second image frame is greater than a predetermined value; obtaining the first backlight control signal, specifically including Obtain the first backlight control signal of the first image frame corresponding to each pixel group in at least one pixel group, and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame corresponding to each pixel group in at least one pixel group.
  • the multiple light-emitting devices in the backlight module are also divided into multiple light-emitting device groups, and one pixel group in the display panel corresponds to one group in the backlight module.
  • Light emitting device group when the pixels of the display panel are divided into multiple pixel groups, the multiple light-emitting devices in the backlight module are also divided into multiple light-emitting device groups, and one pixel group in the display panel corresponds to one group in the backlight module. Light emitting device group. Then, in a pixel group, the difference between the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the first image frame and the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the second image frame is greater than a predetermined value, and the predetermined value may be within the pixel group.
  • the pixel The group may be a pixel group with outstanding 3D effect, or it may be a pixel group corresponding to the out-of-screen and in-screen effects in the 3D image.
  • the difference between the number of assigned pixels corresponding to the first image frame and the number of assigned pixels corresponding to the second image frame is less than a predetermined value, indicating that the current pixel group is displaying the first image frame. Compared with when displaying the second image frame, the number of assigned pixels is not much different, and the 3D effect is not prominent.
  • the predetermined value may be 10% of the total number of pixels in the pixel group, or it may be 20% of the total number of pixels in the pixel group. For example, when the refresh rate of the display panel becomes faster, the percentage will decrease. , the embodiment of the present application does not limit the predetermined value.
  • the first backlight control signal is obtained, which specifically includes obtaining the light-emitting device group corresponding to each pixel group with outstanding 3D effect.
  • the first backlight control signal is used to realize that every time the backlight control signal is switched, the driving circuit only needs to compare the backlight control signals of the light-emitting devices in the area corresponding to the pixel group with a more prominent effect of the 3D image, and the number of light-emitting devices controlled will be Reduced again, the efficiency of control will increase again.
  • inventions of the present application provide a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer-readable storage medium includes computer instructions. When the computer instructions are run on a computer, they cause the computer to execute the backlight control method shown in FIG. 13 or FIG. 14 . For example, if each step in Figure 13 or Figure 14 is implemented in the form of a software function module and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the embodiments of the present application is essentially or contributes to the existing technology, or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a
  • the storage medium includes several instructions to cause a computer device (which can be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) or a processor to execute all or part of the steps of the backlight control method described in various embodiments of the present application.
  • Storage media for storing computer software products include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk, etc., which can store program code medium.
  • the above embodiments it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • a software program it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer-executable instructions.
  • the computer execution instructions When the computer execution instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the computer is caused to execute the backlight control method described in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
  • Computer-executable instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another.
  • Computer-executable instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center via a wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, microwave, etc.) to another website, computer, server or data center.
  • Computer-readable storage media can be any available media that can be accessed by a computer or include one or more data storage devices such as servers and data centers that can be integrated with the media.
  • Usable media may be magnetic media (e.g., floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (e.g., DVDs), or semiconductor media (e.g., Such as solid state disk (SSD)), etc.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Nonlinear Science (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Mathematical Physics (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Liquid Crystal Display Device Control (AREA)

Abstract

The present application relates to the technical field of optical display, and provides a backlight module, a display device, and a backlight control method. The backlight module is used in a display device, and control complexity of the backlight module is lower than that of existing backlight modules. The backlight module comprises a plurality of light-emitting devices and a driving circuit connected to the plurality of light-emitting devices. The driving circuit is configured to obtain a first backlight control signal of a first image frame and a second backlight control signal of a second image frame, wherein the first backlight control signal comprises switching signals respectively corresponding to the plurality of light-emitting devices, the second image frame is an image frame previous to the first image frame, and the second backlight control signal comprises switching signals respectively corresponding to the plurality of light-emitting devices; and switch on/off states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal.

Description

一种背光模组、显示设备及背光控制方法A backlight module, display device and backlight control method
本申请要求于2022年7月27日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为202210896066.8、申请名称为“一种背光模组、显示设备及背光控制方法”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application requests the priority of the Chinese patent application submitted to the State Intellectual Property Office of China on July 27, 2022, with the application number 202210896066.8 and the application title "A backlight module, display device and backlight control method", and its entire contents incorporated herein by reference.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及光显示技术领域,尤其是涉及一种背光模组、显示设备及背光控制方法。The present application relates to the field of light display technology, and in particular to a backlight module, a display device and a backlight control method.
背景技术Background technique
显示设备中大多会设置用于显示图像的背光模组以及显示面板,其中,背光模组包括灯板,灯板上设置有阵列分布的多个发光器件,多个发光器件中的一个或多个发光器件开启,开启的发光器件发光生成光束,且光束会传输至显示面板,显示面板接收图像帧,在图像帧的驱动下,显示面板显示图像。Most display devices are equipped with a backlight module and a display panel for displaying images. The backlight module includes a light panel. The light panel is provided with multiple light-emitting devices distributed in an array. One or more of the multiple light-emitting devices The light-emitting device is turned on, and the turned-on light-emitting device emits light to generate a light beam, and the light beam is transmitted to the display panel. The display panel receives the image frame, and driven by the image frame, the display panel displays the image.
在显示面板显示相邻的两帧图像帧对应的图像时,相邻的两帧图像帧所需的光束可能不同,那么就需要控制背光模组中的不同的发光器件开启进而生成不同的光束。其中,在显示相邻的两帧图像帧中的后一图像帧对应的图像时,通常是先控制背光模组将相邻的两帧图像帧中的前一图像帧对应的开启的发光器件先关闭,然后再控制将相邻的两帧图像帧中的后一图像帧对应的发光器件开启,控制的复杂度较高。When the display panel displays images corresponding to two adjacent image frames, the light beams required for the two adjacent image frames may be different, so it is necessary to control the different light-emitting devices in the backlight module to turn on to generate different light beams. Among them, when displaying the image corresponding to the latter image frame among the two adjacent image frames, the backlight module is usually controlled first to turn on the light-emitting device corresponding to the previous image frame among the two adjacent image frames. Turn off, and then control to turn on the light-emitting device corresponding to the latter of the two adjacent image frames, and the control complexity is high.
尤其在裸眼三维(3-dimension,3D)技术的指向背光技术中,相邻的两帧图像帧往往是左眼图像帧与右眼图像帧,且左眼图像帧与右眼图像帧之间需要快速切换,使得现有的背光模组的控制复杂度变得更高。Especially in the directional backlight technology of naked-eye three-dimensional (3D) technology, the two adjacent image frames are often the left eye image frame and the right eye image frame, and there is a need between the left eye image frame and the right eye image frame. Fast switching makes the control complexity of existing backlight modules higher.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请提供了一种背光模组、显示设备及背光控制方法,该背光模组应用于显示设备中,该背光模组的控制复杂度较现有的背光模组的控制复杂度低。This application provides a backlight module, a display device and a backlight control method. The backlight module is used in a display device. The control complexity of the backlight module is lower than that of the existing backlight module.
第一方面,提供了一种背光模组,应用于显示设备,背光模组包括多个发光器件以及与多个发光器件连接的驱动电路;驱动电路,用于获取第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号,以及第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号,其中,第一背光控制信号包括多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号,第二图像帧为第一图像帧的前一图像帧,第二背光控制信号包括多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号;切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态。在上述的背光模组中,由于第一背光控制信号为第一图像帧的背光控制信号,第二背光控制信号为第二图像帧的背光控制信号,且第二图像帧为第一图像帧的前一图像帧,并且驱动电路可以获取到第一背光控制信号,也可以将第一背光控制信号与第二背光控制信号进行对比,依次确定第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中的一个或多个不同的开关信号。这一个或多个不同的开关信号即是在第二图像帧对应的所有发光器件的开光状态的基础上,需要切换开关状态的发光器件,并且,这些 需要切换开关状态的发光器件的开关状态切换后,即是第一图像帧对应的所有发光器件的开光状态。因此驱动电路根据一个或多个不同的开关信号,切换一个或多个不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,以使得在相邻两个图像帧切换时,不需要先将所有的发光器件都关闭,再开启对应的发光器件,只需要在至少一个开光信号的作用下,将需要切换开关状态的发光器件的开关状态切换,使得需要刷新的发光器件的数量减少,以使得该背光模组的控制复杂度降低。In a first aspect, a backlight module is provided for use in a display device. The backlight module includes a plurality of light-emitting devices and a driving circuit connected to the plurality of light-emitting devices; the driving circuit is used to obtain the first backlight of the first image frame. control signal, and a second backlight control signal of the second image frame, wherein the first backlight control signal includes a switching signal corresponding to each light-emitting device in the plurality of light-emitting devices, and the second image frame is the previous one of the first image frame. In the image frame, the second backlight control signal includes a switching signal corresponding to each light-emitting device in the plurality of light-emitting devices; switching the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to a different switching signal in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal. In the above backlight module, since the first backlight control signal is the backlight control signal of the first image frame, the second backlight control signal is the backlight control signal of the second image frame, and the second image frame is the backlight control signal of the first image frame. The previous image frame, and the driving circuit can obtain the first backlight control signal, or can compare the first backlight control signal with the second backlight control signal, and determine the difference between the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal in turn. One or more different switching signals. This one or more different switching signals are the light-emitting devices that need to be switched on and off based on the light-on states of all the light-emitting devices corresponding to the second image frame, and these After the switching state of the light-emitting device that needs to be switched is switched, it is the light-on state of all the light-emitting devices corresponding to the first image frame. Therefore, the driving circuit switches the switching state of the light-emitting devices corresponding to one or more different switching signals according to one or more different switching signals, so that when switching between two adjacent image frames, there is no need to first switch all the light-emitting devices All are turned off, and then the corresponding light-emitting device is turned on. It only needs to switch the on-off state of the light-emitting device that needs to be switched under the action of at least one light-on signal, so that the number of light-emitting devices that need to be refreshed is reduced, so that the backlight module The control complexity is reduced.
可选的,第一图像帧为左眼图像帧,第一背光控制信号对应的开关状态为开启的发光器件生成第一光束,第一光束透射至左眼;第二图像帧为右眼图像帧,第二背光控制信号对应的开关状态为开启的发光器件生成第二光束,第二光束透射至右眼;或者,第一图像帧为右眼图像帧,第一背光控制信号对应的开关状态为开启的发光器件生成第一光束,第一光束透射至右眼;第二图像帧为左眼图像帧,第二背光控制信号对应的开关状态为开启的发光器件生成第二光束,第二光束透射至左眼。在该可选方式中,背光模组为指向背光技术中的背光模组,在指向背光技术中,图像帧的切换方式为左眼图像帧,右眼图像帧,左眼图像帧,右眼图像帧…因此相邻的两帧图像帧可以是第一图像帧为左眼图像帧,第二图像帧为右眼图像帧,第一背光控制信号对应的多个发光器件中开关状态为开启的发光器件生成第一光束,第一光束透射至左眼,第二背光控制信号对应的多个发光器件中开关状态为开启的发光器件生成第二光束,第二光束透射至右眼;或者第一图像帧为右眼图像帧,第二图像帧为左眼图像帧,第一背光控制信号对应的多个发光器件中开关状态为开启的发光器件生成第一光束,第一光束透射至右眼,第二背光控制信号对应的多个发光器件中开关状态为开启的发光器件生成第二光束,第二光束透射至左眼。并且,在指向背光技术中,相邻的几十帧图像帧甚至几百帧图像帧的背光控制信号之间关联很大,而且切换速度很快,那么根据将第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号与第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号进行对比,找到第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号中与第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号,切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,这样使得指向背光技术中每次需要切换开关状态的发光器件的数量减少,因此切换的速度将变快,也不容易造成发光器件在短时间内闪烁的问题,提升控制效率。Optionally, the first image frame is a left eye image frame, the switch state corresponding to the first backlight control signal is that the light emitting device is turned on to generate a first beam, and the first beam is transmitted to the left eye; the second image frame is a right eye image frame. , the switch state corresponding to the second backlight control signal is that the light-emitting device that is turned on generates a second beam, and the second beam is transmitted to the right eye; or, the first image frame is a right eye image frame, and the switch state corresponding to the first backlight control signal is The light-emitting device that is turned on generates a first light beam, and the first light beam is transmitted to the right eye; the second image frame is an image frame for the left eye, and the switch state corresponding to the second backlight control signal is that the light-emitting device that is turned on generates a second light beam, and the second light beam is transmitted to the left eye. In this optional method, the backlight module is a backlight module in directional backlight technology. In directional backlight technology, the image frame switching method is left eye image frame, right eye image frame, left eye image frame, right eye image Frame... Therefore, the two adjacent image frames can be that the first image frame is a left eye image frame, the second image frame is a right eye image frame, and the switch state of the multiple light emitting devices corresponding to the first backlight control signal is on. The device generates a first light beam, and the first light beam is transmitted to the left eye, and the light-emitting device whose switch state is on among the plurality of light-emitting devices corresponding to the second backlight control signal generates a second light beam, and the second light beam is transmitted to the right eye; or the first image The frame is a right-eye image frame, the second image frame is a left-eye image frame, the light-emitting device whose switch state is on among the plurality of light-emitting devices corresponding to the first backlight control signal generates a first light beam, and the first light beam is transmitted to the right eye, and the first light beam is transmitted to the right eye. Among the plurality of light-emitting devices corresponding to the two backlight control signals, the light-emitting device whose switch state is on generates a second light beam, and the second light beam is transmitted to the left eye. Moreover, in the directional backlight technology, the backlight control signals of dozens of adjacent image frames or even hundreds of image frames are closely related, and the switching speed is very fast, then according to the first backlight control signal of the first image frame Compare the signal with the second backlight control signal of the second image frame, find a switch signal in the first backlight control signal of the first image frame that is different from the second backlight control signal of the second image frame, and switch the first backlight control signal The switch state of the light-emitting device corresponds to the different switch signal in the second backlight control signal. This reduces the number of light-emitting devices that need to switch the switch state each time in the pointing backlight technology, so the switching speed will become faster and not easy. This causes the problem of light-emitting devices flickering in a short period of time and improves control efficiency.
可选的,驱动电路,还用于在缓存中读取第二背光控制信号。在该可选方式中,第二背光控制信号为第二图像帧的背光控制信号,第二图像帧为第一图像帧的前一图像帧,其中,前一图像帧的背光控制信号往往会保留在缓存中,因此可以从缓存中读取第二背光控制信号。Optionally, the driving circuit is also used to read the second backlight control signal in the cache. In this optional method, the second backlight control signal is the backlight control signal of the second image frame, and the second image frame is the previous image frame of the first image frame, where the backlight control signal of the previous image frame is often retained. in the cache, so the second backlight control signal can be read from the cache.
可选的,驱动电路,具体用于在时钟信号的控制下,同时切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,或者,按照预定顺序切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,预定顺序包括:逐行切换、逐列切换。在该可选方式中,可以是在时钟信号的控制下,同时切换至少一个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,使得每一帧图像帧对应的需要开启的发光器件同时开启;也可以是在显示面板的切换方式为逐行切换时,背光模组中的驱动电路在时钟信号的控制下,也逐行切换至少一个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态;还可以是在显示面板的切换方式为逐列切换时,背光模组中的驱动电路在时钟信号的控制下,也逐列切换至少一个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态。也就是说驱动电路驱动切换至少一个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,可以跟随显示面板的切换方式而变化,实现灯随屏走的效果。Optionally, the driving circuit is specifically configured to simultaneously switch the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal under the control of the clock signal, or switch in a predetermined order. The switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, the predetermined sequence includes: row-by-row switching and column-by-column switching. In this optional method, the switching state of at least one light-emitting device corresponding to the switching signal can be switched simultaneously under the control of a clock signal, so that the light-emitting devices corresponding to each image frame that need to be turned on are turned on at the same time; it can also be done under the control of a clock signal. When the switching mode of the display panel is row-by-row switching, the driving circuit in the backlight module also switches the switching state of at least one light-emitting device corresponding to the switching signal row by row under the control of the clock signal; it can also be the switching mode of the display panel. When switching column by column, the driving circuit in the backlight module also switches the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to at least one switch signal column by column under the control of the clock signal. That is to say, the driving circuit drives and switches the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to at least one switching signal, and can change following the switching mode of the display panel, thereby achieving the effect of the light following the screen.
可选的,驱动电路,还用于确定第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关 信号。Optionally, the driving circuit is also used to determine the different switches in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal. Signal.
可选的,驱动电路,具体用于将第一背光控制信号与第二背光控制信号中的同一个发光器件的开关信号对应的开关状态做异或运算;根据异或运算的结果,确定第一背光控制信号与第二背光控制信号中的同一个发光器件的开关信号是否相同。在该可选方案中,任一个发光器件的开关信号对应的开关状态为开启或关闭,例如,开关状态为开启可以使用二进制“1”表示,开关状态为关闭可以使用二进制“0”表示,因此在将第一背光控制信号与第二背光控制信号中的同一个发光器件的开关信号对应的开关状态做异或运算时,如果第一背光控制信号与第二背光控制信号中的同一个发光器件的开关信号对应的开关状态相同,则异或运算结果为“0”,如果第一背光控制信号与第二背光控制信号中的同一个发光器件的开关信号对应的开关状态不同,则异或运算结果为“1”,因此可以根据对第一背光控制信号与第二背光控制信号中的同一个发光器件的开关信号对应的开关状态做异或运算得到的异或运算的结果,确定第一背光控制信号与第二背光控制信号中的同一个发光器件的开关信号是否相同。Optionally, the driving circuit is specifically configured to perform an XOR operation on the switching states corresponding to the switching signals of the same light-emitting device in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal; and determine the first backlight control signal according to the result of the XOR operation. Whether the switching signal of the same light-emitting device in the backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal are the same. In this alternative, the switch state corresponding to the switch signal of any light-emitting device is on or off. For example, the switch state is on and can be represented by a binary "1", and the switch state is off can be represented by a binary "0", so When performing an XOR operation on the switching states corresponding to the switching signals of the same light-emitting device in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, if the first backlight control signal and the same light-emitting device in the second backlight control signal If the switch states corresponding to the switch signals of the same light-emitting device in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal are different, the result of the XOR operation is "0". The result is "1". Therefore, the first backlight can be determined based on the result of the Whether the switching signal of the same light-emitting device in the control signal and the second backlight control signal are the same.
第二方面,提供了一种显示设备,包括显示面板以及如上述第一方面任一项所述的背光模组,背光模组中的发光器件生成光束传输至显示面板,以使得第一图像帧驱动显示面板显示图像。A second aspect provides a display device, including a display panel and a backlight module as described in any one of the above first aspects. The light-emitting device in the backlight module generates a light beam and transmits it to the display panel, so that the first image frame Drives the display panel to display images.
可选的,显示设备还包括:位于背光模组与显示面板之间的光学模组;光学模组用于将背光模组中的发光器件生成的对应第一背光控制信号的光束通过显示面板透射至左眼,将背光模组中的发光器件生成的对应第二背光控制信号的光束通过显示面板透射至右眼;或者;光学模组用于将背光模组中的发光器件生成的对应第一背光控制信号的光束通过显示面板透射至右眼,将背光模组中的发光器件生成的对应第二背光控制信号的光束通过显示面板透射至左眼。在该可选方案中,显示设备为应用指向背光技术中的显示设备,在指向背光技术中,主要是光学模组将背光模组中的发光器件生成的光束指向性地传输至观察者的左眼,或者指向性的传输至观察者的右眼。Optionally, the display device also includes: an optical module located between the backlight module and the display panel; the optical module is used to transmit the light beam corresponding to the first backlight control signal generated by the light-emitting device in the backlight module through the display panel. to the left eye, transmitting the light beam corresponding to the second backlight control signal generated by the light-emitting device in the backlight module to the right eye through the display panel; or; the optical module is used to transmit the light beam generated by the light-emitting device in the backlight module corresponding to the first The light beam of the backlight control signal is transmitted to the right eye through the display panel, and the light beam corresponding to the second backlight control signal generated by the light-emitting device in the backlight module is transmitted to the left eye through the display panel. In this alternative, the display device is a display device using directional backlight technology. In directional backlight technology, the optical module mainly transmits the light beam generated by the light-emitting device in the backlight module to the left side of the observer in a directional manner. eye, or directed transmission to the observer's right eye.
可选的,显示设备还包括人眼检测装置,人眼检测装置具有视场角;人眼检测装置,用于检测第一观察者的人眼位置,根据第一观察者的人眼位置生成第一背光控制信号,第一观察者的人眼为第一观察者的左眼或右眼,第一观察者的人眼位置由第一观察者的人眼在视场角中的角度、以及第一观察者的人眼与显示面板的距离确定。在该可选方式中,由于指向背光技术需要将光束指向性地传输至观察者的左眼,或者将光束指向性的传输至观察者的右眼,可见是需要获取观察者的眼睛位置,才能进行指向性的光束的传输,其中第一观察者的人眼可以是第一观察者的左眼或者第一观察者的右眼,第一观察者的人眼位置可以是第一观察者的左眼的位置或者第一观察者的右眼的位置,第一观察者的人眼位置由第一观察者的人眼在人眼检测装置的视场角中的角度、以及第一观察者的人眼与显示设备中的显示面板的距离确定。在确定第一观察者的左眼位置以后,可以生成与第一观察者的左眼的位置存在映射关系的多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号,也就是生成第一背光控制信号,随后将第一背光控制信号传输至背光模组中的驱动电路;或者,在确定观察者的右眼位置以后,可以生成与观察者的右眼的位置存在映射关系的多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号,生成第一背光控制信号,随后将第一背光控制信号传输至背光模组中的驱动电路。Optionally, the display device also includes a human eye detection device, the human eye detection device has a field of view; a human eye detection device, used to detect the human eye position of the first observer, and generate the third human eye position according to the first observer's human eye position. A backlight control signal, the first observer's human eye is the first observer's left eye or right eye, the first observer's human eye position is determined by the angle of the first observer's human eye in the field of view, and the third The distance between an observer's human eyes and the display panel is determined. In this optional method, since the directional backlight technology needs to transmit the light beam directionally to the left eye of the observer, or transmit the light beam directionally to the right eye of the observer, it can be seen that the position of the observer's eyes needs to be obtained in order to The directional light beam is transmitted, in which the human eye of the first observer can be the left eye of the first observer or the right eye of the first observer, and the position of the human eye of the first observer can be the left eye of the first observer. The position of the eye or the position of the first observer's right eye. The position of the first observer's human eye is determined by the angle of the first observer's human eye in the field of view of the human eye detection device, and the first observer's human eye position. The distance between the eye and the display panel in the display device is determined. After determining the position of the first observer's left eye, a switching signal corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting devices that has a mapping relationship with the position of the first observer's left eye can be generated, that is, the first backlight control is generated signal, and then transmit the first backlight control signal to the driving circuit in the backlight module; or, after determining the position of the observer's right eye, multiple light-emitting devices that have a mapping relationship with the position of the observer's right eye can be generated The switching signal corresponding to each light-emitting device is used to generate a first backlight control signal, and then the first backlight control signal is transmitted to the driving circuit in the backlight module.
可选的,显示设备还包括人眼检测装置,人眼检测装置具有视场角;人眼检测装置,用于检测第一观察者的人眼位置,根据第一观察者的人眼位置生成第一子背光控制信号,第一观察者的人眼为第一观察者的左眼或右眼,第一观察者的人眼位置由第一观察者的人眼在视 场角中的角度、以及第一观察者的人眼与显示面板的距离确定;人眼检测装置,还用于检测第二观察者的人眼位置,根据第二观察者的人眼位置生成第二子背光控制信号,第二观察者的人眼为第二观察者的左眼或右眼,第二观察者的人眼位置由第二观察者的人眼在视场角中的角度、以及第二观察者的人眼与显示面板的距离确定;人眼检测装置,还用于根据第一子背光控制信号与第二子背光控制信号生成第一背光控制信号。在该可选方式中,第一观察者的人眼可以是第一观察者的左眼或者第一观察者的右眼,第一观察者的人眼位置可以是第一观察者的左眼的位置或者第一观察者的右眼的位置,那么在第一观察者的人眼位置为第一观察者的左眼的位置(或者第一观察者的右眼的位置)时,可以根据第一观察者的左眼的位置(或者第一观察者的右眼的位置)确定与第一观察者的左眼的位置(或者第一观察者的由眼的位置)存在映射关系的多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号,生成第一子背光控制信号;第二观察者的人眼可以是第二观察者的左眼或者第二观察者的右眼,第二观察者的人眼位置可以是第二观察者的左眼的位置或者第二观察者的右眼的位置,那么在第二观察者的人眼位置为第二观察者的左眼的位置(或者第二观察者的右眼的位置)时,根据第二观察者的左眼的位置(或者第二观察者的右眼的位置)确定与第二观察者的左眼的位置(或者第二观察者的右眼的位置)存在映射关系的多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号,生成第二子背光控制信号,根据第一子背光控制信号与第二子背光控制信号生成第一背光控制信号。该第一背光控制信号中,既包括第一子背光控制信号中要求开启的发光器件的开关信号,也包括第二子背光控制信号中要求开启的发光器件的开关信号。在第一背光控制信号的控制下,第一子背光控制信号中要求开启的发光器件开启发光,生成光束,第二子背光控制信号中要求开启的发光器件开启发光,生成光束,光束会传输至光学模组,光学模组将第一子背光控制信号中要求开启的发光器件开启发光生成光束的传播方向变成指向第一观察者的左眼(或者第一观察者的右眼),传输至显示面板,进而传输至第一观察者的左眼(或者第一观察者的右眼);光学模组将第二子背光控制信号中要求开启的发光器件开启发光生成光束的传播方向变成指向第二观察者的左眼(或者第二观察者的右眼),传输至显示面板,进而传输至第二观察者的左眼(或者第二观察者的右眼);显示面板接收第一观察者的左眼(或者第一观察者的右眼)的图像帧,在第一观察者的左眼(或者第一观察者的右眼)的图像帧的驱动下显示面板显示第一观察者的左眼图像(或者第一观察者的右眼图像),第一观察者的左眼(或者第一观察者的右眼)观看到第一观察者的左眼图像(或者第一观察者的右眼图像);显示面板接收第二观察者的左眼(或者第二观察者的右眼)的图像帧,在第二观察者的左眼(或者第二观察者的右眼)的图像帧的驱动下显示面板显示第二观察者的左眼图像(或者第二观察者的右眼图像),第二观察者的左眼(或者第二观察者的右眼)接收第二观察者的左眼图像(或者第二观察者的右眼图像)。实现在一次刷新过程中,显示不同的人的不同两幅左眼图像或者不同两幅右眼图像。Optionally, the display device also includes a human eye detection device, the human eye detection device has a field of view; a human eye detection device, used to detect the human eye position of the first observer, and generate the third human eye position according to the first observer's human eye position. A sub-backlight control signal, the human eye of the first observer is the left eye or right eye of the first observer, and the position of the human eye of the first observer is determined by the human eye of the first observer. The angle in the field angle and the distance between the first observer's human eyes and the display panel are determined; the human eye detection device is also used to detect the position of the second observer's human eyes, and generate the third observer based on the second observer's human eye position. Second sub-backlight control signal, the second observer's human eye is the second observer's left eye or right eye, the second observer's human eye position is determined by the angle of the second observer's human eye in the field of view, and The distance between the human eyes of the second observer and the display panel is determined; the human eye detection device is also used to generate a first backlight control signal according to the first sub-backlight control signal and the second sub-backlight control signal. In this optional manner, the first observer's human eye may be the first observer's left eye or the first observer's right eye, and the first observer's human eye position may be the first observer's left eye. position or the position of the first observer's right eye, then when the position of the first observer's human eye is the position of the first observer's left eye (or the position of the first observer's right eye), it can be based on the first The position of the observer's left eye (or the position of the first observer's right eye) determines a plurality of light-emitting devices that have a mapping relationship with the position of the first observer's left eye (or the position of the first observer's eye). The switching signal corresponding to each light-emitting device generates a first sub-backlight control signal; the human eye of the second observer can be the left eye of the second observer or the right eye of the second observer. The eye position may be the position of the second observer's left eye or the position of the second observer's right eye, then the human eye position of the second observer is the position of the second observer's left eye (or the position of the second observer's right eye). When the position of the second observer's right eye), the position of the second observer's left eye (or the position of the second observer's right eye) is determined based on the position of the second observer's left eye (or the position of the second observer's right eye). position) with a switching signal corresponding to each of the multiple light-emitting devices having a mapping relationship, generating a second sub-backlight control signal, and generating a first backlight control signal based on the first sub-backlight control signal and the second sub-backlight control signal. . The first backlight control signal includes both the switching signal of the light-emitting device required to be turned on in the first sub-backlight control signal and the switching signal of the light-emitting device required to be turned on in the second sub-backlight control signal. Under the control of the first backlight control signal, the light-emitting device required to be turned on in the first sub-backlight control signal turns on to emit light and generates a light beam. The light-emitting device required to be turned on in the second sub-backlight control signal turns on to emit light and generates a light beam. The light beam will be transmitted to The optical module changes the propagation direction of the light-emitting device required to be turned on in the first sub-backlight control signal to point toward the left eye of the first observer (or the right eye of the first observer), and transmits it to display panel, and then transmitted to the left eye of the first observer (or the right eye of the first observer); the optical module changes the direction of propagation of the light-emitting device required to be turned on in the second sub-backlight control signal to turn on the light generated by the light beam. The left eye of the second observer (or the right eye of the second observer) is transmitted to the display panel, and then transmitted to the left eye of the second observer (or the right eye of the second observer); the display panel receives the first observation The display panel displays the image frame of the first observer's left eye (or the first observer's right eye) driven by the image frame of the first observer's left eye (or the first observer's right eye). The left eye image (or the first observer's right eye image), the first observer's left eye (or the first observer's right eye) views the first observer's left eye image (or the first observer's right eye image) eye image); the display panel receives the image frame of the second observer's left eye (or the second observer's right eye), and the image frame of the second observer's left eye (or the second observer's right eye) The display panel is driven to display the left eye image of the second observer (or the right eye image of the second observer), and the left eye of the second observer (or the right eye of the second observer) receives the left eye image of the second observer. image (or the second observer's right eye image). In one refresh process, two different left-eye images or two different right-eye images of different people can be displayed.
可选的,显示设备还包括控制电路,控制电路与显示面板连接,控制电路与背光模组中的驱动电路连接;控制电路用于将第一图像帧与第二图像帧进行对比,确定显示面板中的至少一个像素组,其中,至少一个像素组中的每一个像素组内,与第一图像帧对应的赋值的像素点的数量和与第二图像帧对应的赋值的像素点的数量之差大于预定值;还用于获取至少一个像素组中每一个像素组对应的第一背光控制信号。在该可选方式中,在一个像素组内,与第一图像帧对应的赋值的像素点的数量和与第二图像帧对应的赋值的像素点的数量之差大于预定值,表明该像素组内显示的3D图像的效果比较突出,可能是3D图像中显示出屏与入屏 的效果对应的一个像素组,那么,在控制多个发光器件时,可以仅获取3D图像的效果比较突出的一个或多个像素组中每一个像素组对应的区域的第一背光控制信号,以使得在显示3D图像时,驱动电路仅需要比较3D图像的效果比较突出的像素组对应的区域内的发光器件的背光控制信号,控制的发光器件的数量将再次减少,控制的效率将再次提升。Optionally, the display device also includes a control circuit, the control circuit is connected to the display panel, and the control circuit is connected to the drive circuit in the backlight module; the control circuit is used to compare the first image frame with the second image frame to determine whether the display panel At least one pixel group in, wherein, within each pixel group in at least one pixel group, the difference between the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the first image frame and the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the second image frame Greater than a predetermined value; it is also used to obtain the first backlight control signal corresponding to each pixel group in at least one pixel group. In this optional method, within a pixel group, the difference between the number of assigned pixels corresponding to the first image frame and the number of assigned pixels corresponding to the second image frame is greater than a predetermined value, indicating that the pixel group The effect of the 3D image displayed inside is more prominent. It may be that the 3D image displays out-of-screen and in-screen A pixel group corresponding to the effect, then, when controlling multiple light-emitting devices, you can only obtain the first backlight control signal of the area corresponding to each pixel group in one or more pixel groups with a relatively prominent effect of the 3D image, so as to When displaying a 3D image, the driving circuit only needs to compare the backlight control signals of the light-emitting devices in the area corresponding to the pixel group with a more prominent effect in the 3D image. The number of light-emitting devices controlled will be reduced again, and the control efficiency will be improved again.
第三方面,提供了一种背光控制方法,应用于显示设备,显示设备包括背光模组,背光模组包括多个发光器件;方法包括:获取第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号,以及第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号,其中,第一背光控制信号包括多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号;第二图像帧为第一图像帧的前一图像帧,第二背光控制信号包括多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号;切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态。In a third aspect, a backlight control method is provided, which is applied to a display device. The display device includes a backlight module, and the backlight module includes a plurality of light-emitting devices; the method includes: acquiring a first backlight control signal of the first image frame, and a third The second backlight control signal of the two image frames, wherein the first backlight control signal includes a switching signal corresponding to each light-emitting device in the plurality of light-emitting devices; the second image frame is the previous image frame of the first image frame, and the second image frame is the previous image frame of the first image frame. The backlight control signal includes a switching signal corresponding to each light-emitting device in the plurality of light-emitting devices; switching the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to a different switching signal in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal.
可选的,第一图像帧为左眼图像帧,第一背光控制信号对应的开关状态为开启的发光器件生成第一光束,第一光束透射至左眼;第二图像帧为右眼图像帧,第二背光控制信号对应的开关状态为开启的发光器件生成第二光束,第二光束透射至右眼;或者,第一图像帧为右眼图像帧,第一背光控制信号对应的开关状态为开启的发光器件生成第一光束,第一光束透射至右眼;第二图像帧为左眼图像帧,第二背光控制信号对应的开关状态为开启的发光器件生成第二光束,第二光束透射至左眼。Optionally, the first image frame is a left eye image frame, the switch state corresponding to the first backlight control signal is that the light emitting device is turned on to generate a first beam, and the first beam is transmitted to the left eye; the second image frame is a right eye image frame. , the switch state corresponding to the second backlight control signal is that the light-emitting device that is turned on generates a second beam, and the second beam is transmitted to the right eye; or, the first image frame is a right eye image frame, and the switch state corresponding to the first backlight control signal is The light-emitting device that is turned on generates a first light beam, and the first light beam is transmitted to the right eye; the second image frame is an image frame for the left eye, and the switch state corresponding to the second backlight control signal is that the light-emitting device that is turned on generates a second light beam, and the second light beam is transmitted to the left eye.
可选的,获取第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号,以及第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号,之前,还包括:检测第一观察者的人眼位置,根据第一观察者的人眼位置生成第一背光控制信号,第一观察者的人眼为第一观察者的左眼或右眼,第一观察者的人眼位置由第一观察者的人眼在视场角中的角度、以及第一观察者的人眼与显示设备中的显示面板的距离确定,其中,视场角为显示设备中的人眼检测装置的视场角。Optionally, before obtaining the first backlight control signal of the first image frame and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame, it also includes: detecting the human eye position of the first observer, and The eye position generates the first backlight control signal. The human eye of the first observer is the left eye or the right eye of the first observer. The human eye position of the first observer is determined by the human eye of the first observer in the field of view. The angle and the distance between the human eye of the first observer and the display panel in the display device are determined, where the field of view angle is the field of view angle of the human eye detection device in the display device.
可选的,获取第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号,以及第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号,之前,还包括:检测第一观察者的人眼位置,根据第一观察者的人眼位置生成第一子背光控制信号,第一观察者的人眼为第一观察者的左眼或右眼,第一观察者的人眼位置由第一观察者的人眼在视场角中的角度、以及第一观察者的人眼与显示设备中的显示面板的距离确定,其中,视场角为所述显示设备中的人眼检测装置的视场角;检测第二观察者的人眼位置,根据第二观察者的人眼位置生成第二子背光控制信号,第二观察者的人眼为第二观察者的左眼或右眼,第二观察者的人眼位置由第二观察者的人眼在视场角中的角度、以及第二观察者的人眼与显示设备中的显示面板的距离确定;根据第一子背光控制信号与第二子背光控制信号生成第一背光控制信号。Optionally, before obtaining the first backlight control signal of the first image frame and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame, it also includes: detecting the human eye position of the first observer, and The eye position generates the first sub-backlight control signal. The human eye of the first observer is the left eye or right eye of the first observer. The human eye position of the first observer is determined by the human eye of the first observer in the field of view. The angle and the distance between the human eyes of the first observer and the display panel in the display device are determined, wherein the field of view angle is the field of view angle of the human eye detection device in the display device; detecting the human eye of the second observer The second sub-backlight control signal is generated according to the eye position of the second observer. The human eye of the second observer is the left eye or the right eye of the second observer. The human eye position of the second observer is determined by the second eye position. The angle of the observer's human eyes in the field of view and the distance between the second observer's human eyes and the display panel in the display device are determined; the first backlight is generated according to the first sub-backlight control signal and the second sub-backlight control signal control signal.
可选的,获取第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号,以及第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号,之前,还包括:将第一图像帧与第二图像帧进行对比,确定显示设备中的显示面板中的至少一个像素组,其中,至少一个像素组中的每一个像素组内,与第一图像帧对应的赋值的像素点的数量和与第二图像帧对应的赋值的像素点的数量之差大于预定值;获取第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号,以及第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号,具体包括获取至少一个像素组中每一个像素组对应的第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号,以及至少一个像素组中每一个像素组对应的第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号。Optionally, obtaining the first backlight control signal of the first image frame and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame also includes: comparing the first image frame with the second image frame to determine whether At least one pixel group in the display panel, wherein in each pixel group in the at least one pixel group, the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the first image frame and the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the second image frame The difference in quantity is greater than a predetermined value; obtaining the first backlight control signal of the first image frame and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame specifically includes obtaining the first image frame corresponding to each pixel group in at least one pixel group. The first backlight control signal, and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame corresponding to each pixel group in at least one pixel group.
可选的,获取第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号,以及第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号之前,还包括:在缓存中读取第二背光控制信号。Optionally, before acquiring the first backlight control signal of the first image frame and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame, the method further includes: reading the second backlight control signal in the cache.
可选的,切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器 件的开关状态,具体包括:在时钟信号的控制下,同时切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,或者,按照预定顺序切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,预定顺序包括:逐行切换、逐列切换。Optionally, switch the light emitter corresponding to the different switch signal in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal. The switching state of the device specifically includes: under the control of a clock signal, simultaneously switching the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, or switching the first backlight control signal in a predetermined sequence. The switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, the predetermined sequence includes: row-by-row switching and column-by-column switching.
可选的,获取第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号,以及第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号之后,还包括:确定第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号。Optionally, after acquiring the first backlight control signal of the first image frame and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame, it further includes: determining a switch signal in the first backlight control signal that is different from the second backlight control signal. .
可选的,确定第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号,具体包括:将第一背光控制信号与第二背光控制信号中的同一个发光器件的开关信号对应的开关状态做异或运算;根据异或运算的结果,确定第一背光控制信号与第二背光控制信号中的同一个发光器件的开关信号是否相同。Optionally, determining the switch signal in the first backlight control signal that is different from the switch signal in the second backlight control signal specifically includes: switching the switch corresponding to the switch signal of the same light-emitting device in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal. An XOR operation is performed on the status; according to the result of the XOR operation, it is determined whether the switching signal of the same light-emitting device in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal is the same.
第四方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,计算机可读存储介质包括计算机指令,当计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如上述第三方面任一项所述的背光控制方法。A fourth aspect provides a computer-readable storage medium. The computer-readable storage medium includes computer instructions. When the computer instructions are run on a computer, they cause the computer to execute the backlight control method as described in any one of the above-mentioned third aspects.
其中,第三方面以及第四方面中任一种可能实现方式中所带来的技术效果可参见上述第一方面或者第二方面的不同的实现方式所带来的技术效果,此处不再赘述。Among them, the technical effects brought about by any of the possible implementation methods of the third aspect and the fourth aspect can be referred to the technical effects brought by the different implementation methods of the first aspect or the second aspect, and will not be described again here. .
附图说明Description of drawings
图1为本申请的实施例提供的显示设备的结构示意图;Figure 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a display device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2为本申请的实施例提供的显示设备中的显示面板与背光模组的结构示意图;Figure 2 is a schematic structural diagram of a display panel and a backlight module in a display device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请的实施例提供的显示面板中的背光模组中的灯板的结构示意图;Figure 3 is a schematic structural diagram of a light panel in a backlight module in a display panel according to an embodiment of the present application;
图4为本申请的实施例提供的背光模组的结构示意图;Figure 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a backlight module provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图5为本申请的实施例提供的背光模组中的发光器件的结构示意图;Figure 5 is a schematic structural diagram of a light-emitting device in a backlight module provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图6为本申请的另一实施例提供的指向背光技术的原理示意图;Figure 6 is a schematic diagram of the principle of directional backlight technology provided by another embodiment of the present application;
图7为本申请的另一实施例提供的指向背光技术的人眼识别原理示意图一;Figure 7 is a schematic diagram 1 of the human eye recognition principle of pointing backlight technology provided by another embodiment of the present application;
图8为本申请的另一实施例提供的指向背光技术的人眼识别原理示意图二;Figure 8 is a second schematic diagram of the human eye recognition principle of pointing backlight technology provided by another embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请的又一实施例提供的指向背光技术的原理示意图;Figure 9 is a schematic diagram of the principle of directional backlight technology provided by yet another embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请的再一实施例提供的显示设备的结构示意图;Figure 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a display device provided by yet another embodiment of the present application;
图11为本申请的再一实施例提供的显示面板的像素组的结构示意图;Figure 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a pixel group of a display panel provided by yet another embodiment of the present application;
图12为本申请的再一实施例提供的背光模组的发光器件组的结构示意图;Figure 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a light-emitting device group of a backlight module provided by yet another embodiment of the present application;
图13为本申请的实施例提供的背光控制方法的流程示意图;Figure 13 is a schematic flowchart of a backlight control method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图14为本申请的另一实施例提供的背光控制方法的流程示意图。FIG. 14 is a schematic flowchart of a backlight control method provided by another embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述,显然,所描述的实施例仅仅是本申请一部分实施例,而不是全部的实施例。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present application. Obviously, the described embodiments are only some of the embodiments of the present application, rather than all of the embodiments.
除非另有定义,否则本文所用的所有科技术语都具有与本领域普通技术人员公知的含义相同的含义。在本申请中,“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a,b或c中的至少 一项(个),可以表示:a,b,c,a和b,a和c,b和c或a、b和c,其中a、b和c可以是单个,也可以是多个。另外,在本申请的实施例中,“第一”、“第二”等字样并不对数量和次序进行限定。Unless otherwise defined, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art. In this application, "at least one" means one or more, and "plurality" means two or more. "And/or" describes the association of associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the related objects are in an "or" relationship. "At least one of the following" or similar expressions thereof refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (items) or a plurality of items (items). For example, at least one of a, b or c An item (item) can represent: a, b, c, a and b, a and c, b and c or a, b and c, where a, b and c can be single or multiple. In addition, in the embodiments of the present application, words such as “first” and “second” do not limit the number and order.
此外,本申请中,“上”、“下”等方位术语是相对于附图中的部件示意置放的方位来定义的,应当理解到,这些方向性术语是相对的概念,它们用于相对于的描述和澄清,其可以根据附图中部件所放置的方位的变化而相应地发生变化。In addition, in this application, directional terms such as "upper" and "lower" are defined relative to the schematically placed directions of the components in the drawings. It should be understood that these directional terms are relative concepts and they are used relative to each other. The descriptions and clarifications may change accordingly according to the changes in the orientation of the components in the drawings.
需要说明的是,本申请中,“示例性的”或者“例如”等词用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本申请中被描述为“示例性的”或者“例如”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其他实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。确切而言,使用“示例性的”或者“例如”等词旨在以具体方式呈现相关概念。It should be noted that in this application, words such as “exemplary” or “for example” are used to represent examples, illustrations or explanations. Any embodiment or design described herein as "exemplary" or "such as" is not intended to be construed as preferred or advantageous over other embodiments or designs. Rather, use of the words "exemplary" or "such as" is intended to present the concept in a concrete manner.
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solutions in this application will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
图1是本申请实施例提供的一种显示设备10的结构示意图。显示设备10可以是广告屏(广告牌)、显示器、3D显示器、电视(如智慧屏)、笔记本电脑、平板电脑、车载设备等大屏显示设备。可选的,在一些场景下,显示设备10可以是手机、电子阅读器或可穿戴设备等设备。其中,图1所示的显示设备10是以显示器为例进行说明。FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a display device 10 provided by an embodiment of the present application. The display device 10 may be an advertising screen (billboard), a monitor, a 3D display, a television (such as a smart screen), a laptop, a tablet, a vehicle-mounted device, or other large-screen display device. Optionally, in some scenarios, the display device 10 may be a mobile phone, an e-reader, or a wearable device. The display device 10 shown in FIG. 1 is explained using a display as an example.
显示设备10可以包括壳体11和显示面板22。当然,图1示出的只是显示设备10的一种示例,该示例并不对显示设备10的结构构成限定,在其他示例中,显示设备10还可以包括更多的结构或部件。The display device 10 may include a housing 11 and a display panel 22 . Of course, FIG. 1 shows only an example of the display device 10, and this example does not limit the structure of the display device 10. In other examples, the display device 10 may also include more structures or components.
壳体11可以包括边框和后盖。边框可以环绕设于后盖的周缘。壳体11例如可以包括显示设备10的中框。在一个示例中,显示设备10的中框可以收容于边框的内周。在另一个示例中,显示设备10的中框可以充当壳体11的边框。显示面板22可以是为显示设备10提供显示功能。用户可以观看显示面板22以欣赏图像、视频等媒体资源。显示面板22可以安装于壳体11上。显示面板22的周缘可以抵靠在边框的内沿。边框可以将显示面板22固定在壳体11上。显示面板22和后盖可以分别安装于边框的两侧,使得壳体11可以为显示设备内部的器件,尤其是显示面板22上的器件,提供机械保护的功能。显示面板22例如可以固定于显示设备10的中框上。The housing 11 may include a frame and a back cover. The frame can surround the periphery of the back cover. The housing 11 may include, for example, a middle frame of the display device 10 . In one example, the middle frame of the display device 10 may be accommodated within the inner periphery of the frame. In another example, the middle frame of the display device 10 may serve as a border of the housing 11 . The display panel 22 may provide a display function for the display device 10 . The user can watch the display panel 22 to enjoy media resources such as images and videos. The display panel 22 can be installed on the housing 11 . The peripheral edge of the display panel 22 may abut against the inner edge of the frame. The frame can fix the display panel 22 on the housing 11 . The display panel 22 and the back cover can be installed on both sides of the frame respectively, so that the housing 11 can provide mechanical protection for the components inside the display device, especially the components on the display panel 22 . For example, the display panel 22 may be fixed on the middle frame of the display device 10 .
显示设备10还可以包括控制电路。控制电路的具体实现形式例如可以包括处理器、控制器、连接器、驱动板、集成电路、芯片、电源板等。该控制电路可以收容于壳体11内。在一个示例中,控制电路可以包括至少一个通信接口、总线、至少一个处理器和至少一个存储器。至少一个通信接口、至少一个处理器及至少一个存储器可通过总线相互通信。至少一个通信接口可以用于接收和发送信号。例如,显示面板22的发光器件可以连接其中一个通信接口,使得控制电路可以触发发光器件开启发光。至少一个存储器用于存储应用程序代码。应用程序代码例如可以包括控制发光器件开启发光或关闭不发光的代码。至少一个处理器可以用于执行上述应用程序代码,以实现对发光器件的控制。本申请中,“至少一个”例如包括一个或多个两种情况。Display device 10 may also include control circuitry. Specific implementation forms of the control circuit may include, for example, a processor, a controller, a connector, a drive board, an integrated circuit, a chip, a power board, etc. The control circuit can be accommodated in the housing 11 . In one example, the control circuit may include at least one communication interface, a bus, at least one processor, and at least one memory. At least one communication interface, at least one processor and at least one memory can communicate with each other via a bus. At least one communication interface can be used to receive and send signals. For example, the light-emitting device of the display panel 22 can be connected to one of the communication interfaces, so that the control circuit can trigger the light-emitting device to turn on and emit light. At least one memory is used to store application code. The application code may include, for example, code that controls the light emitting device to turn on or off to emit light. At least one processor can be used to execute the above application code to control the light-emitting device. In this application, "at least one" includes, for example, one or more of both situations.
其中,在显示面板22靠近显示设备的后盖的一个还设置有背光模组。Among them, a backlight module is also provided on one of the display panels 22 close to the back cover of the display device.
下面结合图2,阐述本申请实施例提供的显示设备10中的背光模组21以及显示面板22。在图2中示出了背光模组21以及设置于背光模组21出光侧的显示面板22。背光模组21可以包括层叠设置的背板211、平整板212、灯板213、扩散板214、光学膜片215等部件。当然以上图2中只是示例性的提供了一种背光模组21的通用结构,在一些示例中背光模组21 可能还包括比上述更多或者更少的部件。The following describes the backlight module 21 and the display panel 22 in the display device 10 provided by the embodiment of the present application with reference to FIG. 2 . FIG. 2 shows the backlight module 21 and the display panel 22 provided on the light exit side of the backlight module 21 . The backlight module 21 may include a stacked back plate 211, a flat plate 212, a light plate 213, a diffusion plate 214, an optical film 215 and other components. Of course, the above figure 2 only provides an exemplary general structure of the backlight module 21. In some examples, the backlight module 21 There may be more or fewer components than listed above.
背板211可以具有支撑显示设备10、为显示设备10内的电子元件提供机械保护等功能。背板211的材料可以是满足机械强度要求、可以起到支撑作用的材料。例如,背板211可以是不锈钢、铝合金、锌合金、钛合金等金属材料,或者,背板211可以是树脂等非金属材料。The backplane 211 may have functions such as supporting the display device 10 and providing mechanical protection for electronic components in the display device 10 . The material of the back plate 211 can be a material that meets mechanical strength requirements and can play a supporting role. For example, the back plate 211 may be made of metal materials such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, zinc alloy, or titanium alloy, or the back plate 211 may be made of non-metal materials such as resin.
平整板212可以位于灯板213与背板211之间。平整板212可以用于为灯板213提供支撑,以维持或保证灯板213的平整度。平整板212可以是具有一定刚度的导电材料。例如平整板212可以为铝板。平整板212例如可以通过双面胶、泡棉等机械连接件,固定于背板211上。The flat plate 212 may be located between the light panel 213 and the back panel 211 . The flat plate 212 can be used to provide support for the light panel 213 to maintain or ensure the flatness of the light panel 213. The flat plate 212 may be a conductive material with certain stiffness. For example, the flat plate 212 may be an aluminum plate. The flat plate 212 can be fixed on the back plate 211 through mechanical connectors such as double-sided tape or foam.
光学膜片215可以改变来自灯板213的光的频率。光学膜片215可以包括量子点。例如,灯板213可以发出高能量的蓝光;蓝光可以激发封装在光学膜片215内的量子点,从而量子点可以将灯板213发出的蓝光转换为白光(量子点可以是一种纳米级的半导体;通过对量子点施加一定的电场或光压,量子点可以发出特定频率的光)。量子点例如可以形成于化学涂层、荧光粉等。The optical film 215 can change the frequency of light from the light panel 213. Optical film 215 may include quantum dots. For example, the lamp panel 213 can emit high-energy blue light; the blue light can excite the quantum dots encapsulated in the optical film 215, so that the quantum dots can convert the blue light emitted by the lamp panel 213 into white light (the quantum dot can be a nano-scale Semiconductor; by applying a certain electric field or light pressure to the quantum dots, the quantum dots can emit light of a specific frequency). Quantum dots can be formed in chemical coatings, phosphors, etc., for example.
在其他示例中,扩散板214可以包括量子点,故扩散板214可以改变来自灯板213的光的频率。在一些实施例中,扩散板214可以与光学膜片215一体成型。灯板213发出的光可以仅经过混光处理,且不经过其他光学处理,并直接射入扩散板214。In other examples, the diffusion plate 214 may include quantum dots, so the diffusion plate 214 may change the frequency of light from the light panel 213 . In some embodiments, the diffusion plate 214 may be integrally formed with the optical film 215 . The light emitted by the lamp panel 213 may only undergo light mixing processing without other optical processing, and directly enter the diffusion plate 214 .
具体的,灯板213发出的光,通过扩散板214、光学膜片215传输至显示面板22。显示面板22可以是液晶显示器(liquid crystal display,LCD),显示面板22可以包括液晶层和滤光层,显示面板22又是也被称为液晶面板。液晶层的液晶可以控制液晶单元开启或关闭,以控制白光穿过液晶单元的光强。通过开启液晶单元,使得穿过液晶单元的白光可以照射滤光层上。滤光层可以包括红光滤光片、绿光滤光片、蓝光滤光片。红光滤光片可以用于将白光转换为红光。绿光滤光片可以用于将白光转换为绿光。蓝光滤光片可以用于将白光转换为蓝光。由此,可以控制显示设备10发出多种颜色的光,以显示彩色图案。其中,预定数量的液晶单元组成一个像素点,向每一个像素点可以赋像素值以使得当前像素点显示不同的颜色,其中,像素值可以是当前像素点的灰度值或者当前像素点的红绿蓝(red green blue,RGB)三色的色度值。Specifically, the light emitted by the light panel 213 is transmitted to the display panel 22 through the diffusion plate 214 and the optical film 215 . The display panel 22 may be a liquid crystal display (LCD). The display panel 22 may include a liquid crystal layer and a filter layer. The display panel 22 is also called a liquid crystal panel. The liquid crystal in the liquid crystal layer can control the liquid crystal unit to turn on or off to control the intensity of white light passing through the liquid crystal unit. By turning on the liquid crystal unit, the white light passing through the liquid crystal unit can illuminate the filter layer. The filter layer may include a red light filter, a green light filter, and a blue light filter. Red light filters can be used to convert white light to red light. Green light filters can be used to convert white light into green light. Blue light filters can be used to convert white light to blue light. Thus, the display device 10 can be controlled to emit light of multiple colors to display color patterns. Among them, a predetermined number of liquid crystal units form a pixel, and a pixel value can be assigned to each pixel so that the current pixel displays different colors. The pixel value can be the gray value of the current pixel or the red color of the current pixel. The chromaticity value of the three colors red green blue (RGB).
示例性的,参照图3所示,其中,灯板213具体可以设置阵列排布的多个发光器件L。发光器件L可以是具有发光功能的芯片,或者,发光器件L可以是发光二极管(light-emitting diode,LED),其中,灯板213还包括与多个发光器件连接的驱动电路,驱动电路用于获取包括多个开关信号的背光控制信号,该背光控制信号中的多个开关信号用于控制灯板213上设置的多个发光器件的开关状态,例如在开关信号对应的开关状态为二进制“1”时,表示控制发光器件开启,发光器件发光;在开关信号对应的开关状态为二进制“0”时,控制发光器件关闭,发光器件不发光。其中,驱动电路根据背光控制信号控制开关信号对应的开关状态为二进制“1”的发光器件L开启发光,也就是开启的发光器件L生成光束,在后续实施例中将使用光束来表示发光器件发出的光,其中,开启的发光器件L发光生成的光束将传输至显示面板22。For example, referring to FIG. 3 , the light panel 213 may be provided with a plurality of light-emitting devices L arranged in an array. The light-emitting device L may be a chip with a light-emitting function, or the light-emitting device L may be a light-emitting diode (LED). The light board 213 also includes a driving circuit connected to a plurality of light-emitting devices. The driving circuit is used to Obtain a backlight control signal including multiple switch signals. The multiple switch signals in the backlight control signal are used to control the switch states of multiple light-emitting devices provided on the light panel 213. For example, when the switch state corresponding to the switch signal is binary "1" ", it means that the light-emitting device is controlled to be turned on and the light-emitting device emits light; when the switch state corresponding to the switch signal is binary "0", the light-emitting device is controlled to be turned off and the light-emitting device does not emit light. Among them, the driving circuit controls the light-emitting device L whose switch state is binary "1" corresponding to the switch signal according to the backlight control signal to turn on the light, that is, the turned-on light-emitting device L generates a light beam. In subsequent embodiments, the light beam will be used to represent the light emitted by the light-emitting device. of light, wherein the light beam generated by the turned-on light-emitting device L will be transmitted to the display panel 22 .
显示面板22还接收图像帧,图像帧也就是图像信号,其中,每一帧图像帧对应有一个背光控制信号,图像帧可以是显示设备10中的处理器生成的图像帧,通过显示设备10的控制电路传输至显示面板22,图像帧用于控制显示面板22上的液晶单元的开启或关闭,也就是图像帧用于控制显示面板22上的像素点的像素值,因此,在图像帧的驱动下,显示面板显示 图像。The display panel 22 also receives image frames, which are also image signals. Each image frame corresponds to a backlight control signal. The image frame may be an image frame generated by the processor in the display device 10 . The control circuit is transmitted to the display panel 22. The image frame is used to control the opening or closing of the liquid crystal unit on the display panel 22. That is, the image frame is used to control the pixel value of the pixel point on the display panel 22. Therefore, during the driving of the image frame down, the display panel displays image.
其中,在显示面板显示相邻的两帧图像帧对应的图像时,相邻的两帧图像帧分别传输至显示面板22,也需要相邻的两帧图像帧所需的光束分别传输至显示面板22。其中,相邻的两帧图像帧所需的光束可能不同,那么就需要控制背光模组中不同的发光器件开启进而生成不同的光束。具体的,在显示相邻的两帧图像帧中的后一图像帧对应的图像时,通常是先控制背光模组将相邻的两帧图像帧中的前一图像帧对应的开启的发光器件先关闭,然后再控制将相邻的两帧图像帧中的后一图像帧对应的发光器件开启,控制的复杂度较高,而且往往是遍历所有的发光器件的开关状态,然后再关闭开启的发光器件,在灯板上的发光器件的数量变多时,控制的时延也将变大。When the display panel displays images corresponding to two adjacent image frames, the two adjacent image frames are transmitted to the display panel 22 respectively, and the light beams required for the two adjacent image frames also need to be transmitted to the display panel respectively. twenty two. Among them, the light beams required for two adjacent image frames may be different, so it is necessary to control the different light-emitting devices in the backlight module to turn on to generate different light beams. Specifically, when displaying the image corresponding to the latter image frame among the two adjacent image frames, the backlight module is usually first controlled to turn on the light-emitting device corresponding to the previous image frame among the two adjacent image frames. First turn it off, and then control to turn on the light-emitting device corresponding to the latter of the two adjacent image frames. The control complexity is high, and it often traverses the switching status of all the light-emitting devices, and then turns it off and on. Light-emitting devices, when the number of light-emitting devices on the light board increases, the control delay will also increase.
其中,在3D技术领域,上述背光模组的控制复杂度会进一步加剧。具体的,3D技术是基于观察者的眼睛的视觉差原理,通过一定的光学技术使得观察者观察到3D图像。3D技术分为眼镜式3D技术以及裸眼3D技术两类,眼镜式3D技术主要是通过给观察者佩戴左右眼设置有不同偏振态的镜片,进而使得观察者的左右眼接收到不同的图像,实现观察到3D图像的目的。Among them, in the field of 3D technology, the control complexity of the above-mentioned backlight module will be further intensified. Specifically, 3D technology is based on the principle of visual difference of the observer's eyes, and uses certain optical technology to enable the observer to observe 3D images. 3D technology is divided into two categories: glasses-type 3D technology and naked-eye 3D technology. Glasses-type 3D technology mainly enables the observer to wear lenses with different polarization states for the left and right eyes, thereby allowing the observer's left and right eyes to receive different images. The purpose of observing 3D images.
裸眼3D技术相较于眼镜式3D技术,优点在于不需要使用眼镜。目前,裸眼3D技术中的指向背光技术备受关注,在指向背光技术中,显示一幅3D图像往往是先显示左眼图像,再显示右眼图像,如果左眼图像与右眼图像的显示时间间隔比较小,观察者的左眼接收到左眼图像,观察者的右眼接收到右眼图像,基于视觉暂留原理,观察者的眼睛相当于同时接收到左眼图像以及右眼图像,且观察者接收到的左眼图像与右眼图像存在视差信息,观察者在其大脑中对左眼图像以及右眼图像进行图像融合,然后再进行深度重建,最后立体成像,使得观察者观看到立体图像。Compared with glasses-based 3D technology, the advantage of naked-eye 3D technology is that it does not require the use of glasses. At present, directional backlight technology in naked-eye 3D technology has attracted much attention. In directional backlight technology, when displaying a 3D image, the left eye image is often displayed first, and then the right eye image is displayed. If the display time of the left eye image and the right eye image is The interval is relatively small. The observer's left eye receives the left eye image, and the observer's right eye receives the right eye image. Based on the principle of persistence of vision, the observer's eyes are equivalent to receiving the left eye image and the right eye image at the same time, and There is parallax information between the left eye image and the right eye image received by the observer. The observer fuses the left eye image and the right eye image in his brain, then performs depth reconstruction, and finally stereoscopic imaging, so that the observer can view the stereoscopic image. image.
更具体的,为了使得观察者观看到立体图像,指向背光技术中显示相邻的两帧图像帧中的前一图像帧对应的是左眼图像帧,相邻的两帧图像帧中的后一图像帧对应的是右眼图像帧,相邻的两帧图像帧分别传输至显示面板,也需要相邻的两帧图像帧所需的光束分别传输至显示面板。其中,由于观察者的左眼与右眼存在预定的距离,相邻的两帧图像帧所需的光束存在不同,那么就需要控制背光模组中不同的发光器件开启进而生成不同的光束。例如,在背光模组是图2所示的背光模组,背光模组上包括的灯板上设置有发光器件1、发光器件2、发光器件3以及发光器件4时,显示左眼图像对应的需要开启的发光器件有发光器件1、发光器件2和发光器件3,显示右眼图像对应的需要开启的发光器件有发光器件2、发光器件3和发光器件4。那么在显示右眼图像时,往往会控制背光模组先将灯板上的发光器件1、发光器件2和发光器件3关闭,再将灯板上的发光器件2、发光器件3和发光器件4开启,不但控制复杂度高,而且会造成发光器件2和发光器件3在短时间内闪烁,影响观看体验。More specifically, in order to enable the observer to view a stereoscopic image, the previous image frame of the two adjacent image frames displayed in the directional backlight technology corresponds to the left eye image frame, and the latter of the two adjacent image frames is displayed. The image frame corresponds to the right eye image frame. Two adjacent image frames are transmitted to the display panel respectively, and the light beams required for the two adjacent image frames also need to be transmitted to the display panel respectively. Among them, since there is a predetermined distance between the observer's left eye and right eye, the light beams required for two adjacent image frames are different, so it is necessary to control the different light-emitting devices in the backlight module to turn on to generate different light beams. For example, when the backlight module is the one shown in Figure 2 and the light board included in the backlight module is provided with a light-emitting device 1, a light-emitting device 2, a light-emitting device 3 and a light-emitting device 4, the left eye image corresponding to The light-emitting devices that need to be turned on include light-emitting device 1, light-emitting device 2 and light-emitting device 3. The light-emitting devices that need to be turned on to display the right eye image include light-emitting device 2, light-emitting device 3 and light-emitting device 4. Then when displaying the right eye image, the backlight module is often controlled to first turn off the light-emitting device 1, the light-emitting device 2 and the light-emitting device 3 on the lamp board, and then turn off the light-emitting device 2, the light-emitting device 3 and the light-emitting device 4 on the lamp board. When turned on, not only is the control complexity high, but it will also cause the light-emitting device 2 and the light-emitting device 3 to flash in a short period of time, affecting the viewing experience.
因此,本申请的实施例提供了一种背光模组,该背光模组的控制复杂度比现有的背光模组的控制复杂度低,且控制的发光器件的数量比较少,控制效率较高。参照图4所示,背光模组40应用于显示设备,背光模组40包括多个发光器件(例如图4所示的发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4)以及与多个发光器件连接的驱动电路42。其中,多个发光器件往往设置于灯板41上,且在灯板41上阵列分布,如图4所示,发光器件L1与发光器件L2位于同一行,发光器件L3与发光器件L4位于同一行,发光器件L1与发光器件L3位于同一列,发光器件L2与发光器件L4位于同一列。发光器件可以是具有发光功能的芯片,或者,发光器件可以是LED,后续以发光器件为LED为了进行说明, Therefore, embodiments of the present application provide a backlight module whose control complexity is lower than that of existing backlight modules, and the number of controlled light-emitting devices is relatively small, and the control efficiency is high. . Referring to FIG. 4 , a backlight module 40 is applied to a display device. The backlight module 40 includes a plurality of light-emitting devices (such as the light-emitting device L1 , the light-emitting device L2 , the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 shown in FIG. 4 ) and multiple light-emitting devices. A driving circuit 42 connected to a light-emitting device. Among them, multiple light-emitting devices are often arranged on the lamp panel 41 and are distributed in an array on the lamp panel 41. As shown in Figure 4, the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L2 are located in the same row, and the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 are located in the same row. , the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L3 are located in the same column, and the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L4 are located in the same column. The light-emitting device may be a chip with a light-emitting function, or the light-emitting device may be an LED. For the following explanation, the light-emitting device is an LED.
具体的,以发光器件L1为例,任意一个发光器件可以是单个LED,参照图5中的(a)所示,发光器件L1包括一个LED,在发光器件L1接收到的开关信号对应的开关状态为二进制数值“1”时,该LED开启发光,在发光器件L1接收到的开关信号对应的开关状态为二进制数值“0”时,该LED关闭不发光。或者,任意一个发光器件可以是一串LED,参照图5中的(b)所示,发光器件L1包括一串4个LED,在发光器件L1接收到的开关信号对应的开关状态为二进制数值“1”时,该4个LED都开启发光,在发光器件L1接收到的开关信号对应的开关状态为二进制数值“0”时,该4个LED都关闭不发光。或者,任意一个发光器件可以是一组阵列分布的LED,参照图5中的(c)所示,发光器件L1包括2*2阵列分布的LED,在发光器件L1接收到的开关信号对应的开关状态为二进制数值“1”时,该2*2阵列分布的LED都开启发光,在发光器件L1接收到的开关信号对应的开关状态为二进制数值“0”时,该2*2阵列分布的LED都关闭不发光。本申请的实施例对发光器件中包括的LED的数量以及LED的排列方式不做限制。Specifically, taking the light-emitting device L1 as an example, any light-emitting device can be a single LED. Referring to (a) in Figure 5, the light-emitting device L1 includes an LED. In the switching state corresponding to the switching signal received by the light-emitting device L1 When the binary value is "1", the LED is turned on to emit light. When the switch state corresponding to the switch signal received by the light-emitting device L1 is the binary value "0", the LED is turned off and does not emit light. Alternatively, any light-emitting device can be a string of LEDs. Referring to (b) in Figure 5, the light-emitting device L1 includes a string of 4 LEDs. The switching state corresponding to the switching signal received by the light-emitting device L1 is a binary value. 1", the four LEDs are all turned on and emit light. When the switch state corresponding to the switch signal received by the light-emitting device L1 is the binary value "0", the four LEDs are all turned off and do not emit light. Alternatively, any light-emitting device can be a set of LEDs distributed in an array. Referring to (c) in Figure 5, the light-emitting device L1 includes a 2*2 array of LEDs. The switch corresponding to the switch signal received by the light-emitting device L1 When the state is a binary value "1", the LEDs distributed in the 2*2 array are all turned on and emit light. When the switch state corresponding to the switch signal received by the light-emitting device L1 is a binary value "0", the LEDs distributed in the 2*2 array All are closed and do not emit light. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the number of LEDs included in the light-emitting device and the arrangement of the LEDs.
在另一些实施例中,也可以是在发光器件L1接收到的开关信号对应的开关状态为二进制数值“0”时,发光器件L1开启发光,在发光器件L1接收到的开关信号对应的开关状态为二进制数值“1”时,发光器件L1关闭不发光。或者,在发光器件L1接收到的开关信号对应的开关状态为二进制数值“10”时,发光器件L1开启发光,在发光器件L1接收到的开关信号对应的开关状态为二进制数值“01”时,发光器件L1关闭不发光。本申请的实施例对开关信号对应的开关状态的具体表示形式不做限定,在后续的描述中,以发光器件L1接收到的开关信号对应的开关状态为二进制数值“1”时,发光器件L1开启发光,在发光器件L1接收到的开关信号对应的开关状态为二进制数值“0”时,发光器件L1关闭不发光为了进行说明。In other embodiments, when the switch state corresponding to the switch signal received by the light-emitting device L1 is a binary value "0", the light-emitting device L1 turns on to emit light, and when the switch state corresponding to the switch signal received by the light-emitting device L1 When it is a binary value "1", the light-emitting device L1 is turned off and does not emit light. Or, when the switch state corresponding to the switch signal received by the light-emitting device L1 is a binary value "10", the light-emitting device L1 turns on to emit light, and when the switch state corresponding to the switch signal received by the light-emitting device L1 is a binary value "01", The light-emitting device L1 is turned off and does not emit light. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific representation form of the switch state corresponding to the switch signal. In the subsequent description, when the switch state corresponding to the switch signal received by the light-emitting device L1 is a binary value "1", the light-emitting device L1 When the light-emitting device L1 is turned on and the switch state corresponding to the switch signal received by the light-emitting device L1 is a binary value "0", the light-emitting device L1 is turned off and does not emit light for the purpose of illustration.
其中,驱动电路42,用于获取第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号,以及第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号,第一背光控制信号包括多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号,第二图像帧为第一图像帧的前一图像帧,第二背光控制信号包括多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号;切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态。在第一背光控制信号与第二背光控制信号中,一个开关信号对应控制一个发光器件的开关状态。Wherein, the driving circuit 42 is used to obtain the first backlight control signal of the first image frame and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame. The first backlight control signal includes a signal corresponding to each light-emitting device in the plurality of light-emitting devices. switching signal, the second image frame is the previous image frame of the first image frame, the second backlight control signal includes a switching signal corresponding to each light-emitting device in the plurality of light-emitting devices; switching the first backlight control signal and the second backlight The switching states of the light-emitting devices correspond to different switching signals in the control signal. Among the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, one switching signal correspondingly controls the switching state of one light-emitting device.
具体的,参照图4所示,相邻的两帧图像帧为第一图像帧与第二图像帧,且第二图像帧为第一图像帧的前一图像帧,在背光模组40需要显示第一图像帧对应的图像时,背光模组40中的驱动电路42需要获取第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号,且驱动电路42根据第一背光控制信号控制与第一图像帧对应的发光器件的开关状态,以使得开关状态为开启的发光器件发光。参照图4所示,图4中的多个发光器件是以4个发光器件为例进行说明,那么,第一背光信号中包括4个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号,并且,在显示第一图像帧对应的图像时,需要发光器件L2与发光器件L4开启,发光器件L1与发光器件L3关闭。那么,第一背光控制信号包括的4个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态可以是以矩阵形式存在,例如B=(0,1,0,1),其中,矩阵里的每一个元素表示一个发光器件的开关状态,“0”表示开关状态为开启,“1”表示开关状态为关闭。其中,矩阵B=(0,1,0,1)中的第一个元素“0”对应发光器件L1,表示发光器件L1在显示第一图像帧对应的图像时关闭;矩阵B=(0,1,0,1)中的第二个元素“1”对应发光器件L2,表示发光器件L2在显示第一图像帧对应的图像时开启;矩阵B=(0,1,0,1)中的第三个元素“0”对应发光器件L3,表示发光器件L3在显示第一图像帧对应的图像时关闭;矩阵B=(0,1,0,1)中的第四个元素“1”对应发光 器件L4,表示发光器件L4在显示第一的图像帧对应的图像时开启。也就是说,第一背光控制信号中包括多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件的开关信号,且第一背光控制信号中的开关信号的顺序与灯板41上的设置的多个发光器件的顺序有关。Specifically, referring to FIG. 4 , the two adjacent image frames are the first image frame and the second image frame, and the second image frame is the previous image frame of the first image frame. When the backlight module 40 needs to display When the image corresponds to the first image frame, the driving circuit 42 in the backlight module 40 needs to obtain the first backlight control signal of the first image frame, and the driving circuit 42 controls the light emission corresponding to the first image frame according to the first backlight control signal. The switching state of the device, so that the light-emitting device whose switching state is on emits light. Referring to Figure 4, the multiple light-emitting devices in Figure 4 are described by taking four light-emitting devices as an example. Then, the first backlight signal includes a switching signal corresponding to each of the four light-emitting devices, and, When displaying the image corresponding to the first image frame, the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L4 need to be turned on, and the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L3 need to be turned off. Then, the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to the four switching signals included in the first backlight control signal may exist in the form of a matrix, for example, B=(0,1,0,1), where each element in the matrix represents a The switch status of the light-emitting device, "0" indicates that the switch status is on, "1" indicates that the switch status is off. Among them, the first element "0" in matrix B=(0,1,0,1) corresponds to the light-emitting device L1, indicating that the light-emitting device L1 is turned off when displaying the image corresponding to the first image frame; matrix B=(0, The second element "1" in 1,0,1) corresponds to the light-emitting device L2, indicating that the light-emitting device L2 is turned on when displaying the image corresponding to the first image frame; the matrix B=(0,1,0,1) The third element "0" corresponds to the light-emitting device L3, indicating that the light-emitting device L3 is turned off when displaying the image corresponding to the first image frame; the fourth element "1" in the matrix B=(0,1,0,1) corresponds to glow Device L4 means that the light-emitting device L4 is turned on when displaying the image corresponding to the first image frame. That is to say, the first backlight control signal includes the switching signal of each of the plurality of light-emitting devices, and the order of the switching signals in the first backlight control signal is consistent with the order of the plurality of light-emitting devices arranged on the lamp panel 41 . Depends on the order.
在另一些实施例中,第一背光控制信号包括的4个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态也可以是2*2的矩阵表示,例如其中,矩阵中第一行第一列的元素“0”对应发光器件L1,矩阵中第一行第二列的元素“1”对应发光器件L2,矩阵中第二行第一列的元素“0”对应发光器件L3,矩阵中第二行第二列的元素“1”对应发光器件L4。In other embodiments, the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to the four switching signals included in the first backlight control signal can also be represented by a 2*2 matrix, for example Among them, matrix The element "0" in the first row and first column corresponds to the light-emitting device L1, matrix The element "1" in the first row and second column corresponds to the light-emitting device L2, matrix The element "0" in the second row and first column corresponds to the light-emitting device L3, matrix The element "1" in the second row and second column corresponds to the light-emitting device L4.
需要说明的是,本申请的实施例对第一背光控制信号中的多个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态的表示形式不做限定,但是第一背光控制信号中是包括多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号,且第一背光控制信号中的开关信号的顺序与多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件在灯板上的顺序有关。It should be noted that the embodiments of the present application do not limit the representation form of the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to the multiple switching signals in the first backlight control signal. However, the first backlight control signal includes the switching states of the multiple light-emitting devices. There is a switching signal corresponding to each light-emitting device, and the order of the switching signals in the first backlight control signal is related to the order of each light-emitting device in the plurality of light-emitting devices on the lamp board.
示例性的,在显示第一图像帧对应的图像时,需要发光器件L2与发光器件L4开启,发光器件L1与发光器件L3关闭。在显示第一图像帧的前一图像帧,也就是第二图像帧对应的图像时,是发光器件L1与发光器件L2开启,发光器件L3与发光器件L4关闭,其中,第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号,也包括发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4的开关信号各自对应的开关状态“1”、“1”、“0”、“0”。其中,第二背光控制信号中的4个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态也可以用矩阵表示,例如A=(1,1,0,0),其中矩阵A=(1,1,0,0)中的元素按照从左到右的顺序依次表示发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4的开关状态。也就是说,第二背光控制信号中包括多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号,且第二背光控制信号中的开关信号的顺序与多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件在灯板上的顺序有关。更具体的,在本申请的实施例中,第一背光控制信号中第n个开关信号与第二背光控制信号中第n个开关信号对应的发光器件为同一个,n∈[1,4]。For example, when displaying the image corresponding to the first image frame, the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L4 need to be turned on, and the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L3 need to be turned off. When displaying the previous image frame of the first image frame, that is, the image corresponding to the second image frame, the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L2 are turned on, and the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 are turned off, wherein the third image frame of the second image frame is The second backlight control signal also includes the switching states "1", "1", "0", and "0" corresponding to the switching signals of the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3, and the light-emitting device L4. Among them, the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to the four switching signals in the second backlight control signal can also be represented by a matrix, for example, A=(1,1,0,0), where the matrix A=(1,1,0, The elements in 0) represent the switching states of the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3, and the light-emitting device L4 in order from left to right. That is to say, the second backlight control signal includes a switching signal corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting devices, and the order of the switching signals in the second backlight control signal is consistent with that of each of the plurality of light-emitting devices. It depends on the order on the light board. More specifically, in the embodiment of the present application, the light-emitting device corresponding to the n-th switch signal in the first backlight control signal and the n-th switch signal in the second backlight control signal is the same, n∈[1,4] .
驱动电路42获取第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号。具体的,背光模组40应用的显示设备中,显示设备的存储器的缓存中会保留第二图像帧的背光控制信号,因此,驱动电路42可以从缓存中读取第二背光控制信号。The driving circuit 42 acquires the second backlight control signal of the second image frame. Specifically, in the display device where the backlight module 40 is applied, the backlight control signal of the second image frame will be retained in the cache of the memory of the display device. Therefore, the driving circuit 42 can read the second backlight control signal from the cache.
在驱动电路42获取到第一背光控制信号与第二背光控制信号以后,可选的,驱动电路确定第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号。具体的,第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号中的4个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态为矩阵B=(0,1,0,1),其中矩阵B中的元素按照从左到右的顺序依次表示发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4的开关状态;第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号中的4个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态为矩阵A=(1,1,0,0),其中矩阵A中的元素按照从左到右的顺序依次表示发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4的开关状态。通过比较矩阵A以及矩阵B,可以确定第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号,不同的开关信号为发光器件L1对应的开关信号以及发光器件L4对应的开关信号。After the driving circuit 42 acquires the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, optionally, the driving circuit determines a different switch signal in the first backlight control signal and in the second backlight control signal. Specifically, the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to the four switching signals in the first backlight control signal of the first image frame are matrix B=(0,1,0,1), where the elements in matrix B are from left to The order on the right sequentially represents the switching states of the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4; the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to the four switching signals in the second backlight control signal of the second image frame are matrix A. =(1,1,0,0), where the elements in matrix A represent the switching states of the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 in order from left to right. By comparing matrix A and matrix B, different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal can be determined. The different switching signals are the switching signals corresponding to the light-emitting device L1 and the switching signals corresponding to the light-emitting device L4.
更具体的,驱动电路42确定第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号,可以是驱动电路42将第一背光控制信号中的4个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态的矩阵B=(0,1,0,1)中与第二背光控制信号中的4个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态的矩阵A=(1,1,0,0)中的同一个发光器件的开关信号对应的开关状态做异或运算,根据异或运算的 结果,确定第一背光控制信号与第二背光控制信号中的同一个发光器件的开关信号是否相同。其中,异或运算的结果为“0”表示相同,异或运算的结果为“1”表示不同。也就是说,矩阵B中的第一个元素“0”与矩阵A中的第一个元素“1”进行异或运算,异或运算的结果为“1”表示第一背光控制信号与第二背光控制信号中发光器件L1对应的开关信号不同;矩阵B中的第二个元素“1”与矩阵A中的第二个元素“1”进行异或运算,异或运算的结果为“0”表示第一背光控制信号与第二背光控制信号中发光器件L2对应的开关信号相同;矩阵B中的第三个元素“0”与矩阵A中的第三个元素“0”进行异或运算,异或运算的结果为“0”表示第一背光控制信号与第二背光控制信号中发光器件L3对应的开关信号相同;矩阵B中的第四个元素“1”与矩阵A中的第四个元素“0”进行异或运算,异或运算的结果为“1”表示第一背光控制信号与第二背光控制信号中发光器件L4对应的开关信号不同。因此也可以确定第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号,不同的开关信号为发光器件L1对应的开关信号以及发光器件L4对应的开关信号。More specifically, the driving circuit 42 determines the switching signals in the first backlight control signal that are different from the switching signals in the second backlight control signal, which may be that the driving circuit 42 determines the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to the four switching signals in the first backlight control signal. The same matrix A of the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to the four switching signals in the second backlight control signal in the matrix B=(0,1,0,1)=(1,1,0,0) The switching status corresponding to the switching signal of the light-emitting device is XORed. According to the XORed As a result, it is determined whether the switching signal of the same light-emitting device in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal is the same. Among them, the result of the XOR operation is "0", which means the same, and the result of the XOR operation is "1", which means they are different. That is to say, the first element "0" in matrix B performs an XOR operation with the first element "1" in matrix A. The result of the XOR operation is "1", which means that the first backlight control signal and the second The switching signal corresponding to the light-emitting device L1 in the backlight control signal is different; the second element "1" in matrix B performs an XOR operation with the second element "1" in matrix A, and the result of the XOR operation is "0" It means that the switching signal corresponding to the light-emitting device L2 in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal is the same; the third element "0" in matrix B performs an XOR operation with the third element "0" in matrix A, The result of the XOR operation is "0", which means that the switching signal corresponding to the light-emitting device L3 in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal are the same; the fourth element "1" in matrix B is the same as the fourth element "1" in matrix A. The element "0" performs an XOR operation, and the result of the XOR operation is "1" indicating that the switching signals corresponding to the light-emitting device L4 in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal are different. Therefore, it is also possible to determine different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and in the second backlight control signal, and the different switching signals are the switching signals corresponding to the light-emitting device L1 and the switching signals corresponding to the light-emitting device L4.
驱动电路42,用于切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,其中,在确定第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中,不同的开关信号为发光器件L1对应的开关信号以及发光器件L4对应的开关信号,那么,驱动电路42将切换发光器件L1的开关状态,具体是将发光器件L1的开关状态由开启变成关闭,驱动电路42也切换发光器件L4的开关状态,具体是将发光器件L4的开关状态由关闭变成开启。The driving circuit 42 is used to switch the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, wherein in determining the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, The different switching signals are the switching signal corresponding to the light-emitting device L1 and the switching signal corresponding to the light-emitting device L4. Then, the driving circuit 42 will switch the switching state of the light-emitting device L1, specifically changing the switching state of the light-emitting device L1 from on to off. The driving circuit 42 also switches the switching state of the light-emitting device L4, specifically changing the switching state of the light-emitting device L4 from off to on.
示例性的,驱动电路42具体用于在时钟信号的控制下,同时切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,或者,按照预定顺序切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,预定顺序包括:逐行切换、逐列切换。其中,驱动电路42在时钟信号的控制下,同时切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,使得发光器件L1与发光器件L2对应的开关状态切换,实现发光器件L2和发光器件L4开启,发光器件L1和发光器件L3关闭。或者,在显示面板的切换方式为逐行切换时,例如是按照从上到下的顺序逐行切换时,驱动电路42在时钟信号的控制下,也逐行切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,也就是先切换发光器件L1的开关状态,使得从上往下数第一行中的发光器件L2开启,发光器件L1关闭,再切换发光器件L4的开关状态,使得从上往下数第二行中的发光器件L4开启,发光器件L3关闭。或者,在显示面板的切换方式为逐列切换时,例如是按照从左到右的顺序逐列切换时,驱动电路42在时钟信号的控制下,也逐列切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,也就是先切换发光器件L1的开关状态,使得从左往右数第一列中的发光器件L1和发光器件L3都关闭,再切换发光器件L4的开关状态,使得从左往右数第二行中的发光器件L2和发光器件L4都开启。也就是说驱动电路驱动切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,可以跟随显示面板的切换方式而变化,实现灯随屏走的效果。Exemplarily, the driving circuit 42 is specifically configured to simultaneously switch the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal under the control of the clock signal, or switch in a predetermined sequence. The switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, the predetermined sequence includes: row-by-row switching and column-by-column switching. Among them, the driving circuit 42 simultaneously switches the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal under the control of the clock signal, so that the switches corresponding to the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L2 The state is switched to turn on the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L4, and to turn off the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L3. Alternatively, when the switching mode of the display panel is line-by-line switching, for example, when switching line-by-line in order from top to bottom, the driving circuit 42 also switches the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal line-by-line under the control of the clock signal. Different switching signals in the two backlight control signals correspond to the switching status of the light-emitting device, that is, first switch the switching status of the light-emitting device L1 so that the light-emitting device L2 in the first row from top to bottom is turned on, and the light-emitting device L1 is turned off, and then Switch the switching state of the light-emitting device L4 so that the light-emitting device L4 in the second row from top to bottom is turned on and the light-emitting device L3 is turned off. Alternatively, when the switching mode of the display panel is column-by-column switching, for example, when switching column-by-column in order from left to right, the driving circuit 42 also switches the first backlight control signal and the first backlight control signal column-by-column under the control of the clock signal. Different switching signals in the two backlight control signals correspond to the switching status of the light-emitting device, that is, first switch the switching status of the light-emitting device L1 so that the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L3 in the first column from left to right are both turned off, and then Switch the switch state of the light-emitting device L4 so that both the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L4 in the second row from left to right are turned on. That is to say, the driving circuit drives and switches the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, and can change according to the switching mode of the display panel, achieving the effect of the light following the screen.
在上述的背光模组中,由于驱动电路可以获取到第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号,以及第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号,且第二图像帧为第一图像帧的前一图像帧,在驱动电路获取到第一背光控制信号与第二背光控制信号以后,驱动电路就可以切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态。第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号即是在第二图像帧对应的所有发光器件的开关状态的基 础上,需要切换开关状态的发光器件,并且,这些需要切换开关状态的发光器件的开关状态切换后,即是第一图像帧对应的所有发光器件的开关状态。因此驱动电路切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,以使得在相邻两个图像帧切换时,不需要先将所有的发光器件都关闭,再开启对应的发光器件,只需要在第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号的作用下,将需要切换开关状态的发光器件的开关状态切换,使得需要刷新的发光器件的数量减少,以使得该背光模组的控制复杂度降低。In the above-mentioned backlight module, the driving circuit can obtain the first backlight control signal of the first image frame and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame, and the second image frame is the previous one of the first image frame. image frame, after the driving circuit obtains the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, the driving circuit can switch the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to the different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal. . The switching signal in the first backlight control signal that is different from the second backlight control signal is the basis of the switching states of all light-emitting devices corresponding to the second image frame. Basically, the light-emitting devices that need to be switched on and off are switched, and the switching states of these light-emitting devices that need to be switched on and off are the switching states of all the light-emitting devices corresponding to the first image frame. Therefore, the driving circuit switches the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, so that when switching between two adjacent image frames, there is no need to switch all the light-emitting devices first. To turn off and then turn on the corresponding light-emitting device, it is only necessary to switch the switching state of the light-emitting device that needs to be switched under the action of different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, so that the switching state of the light-emitting device that needs to be refreshed is The number of light-emitting devices is reduced, so that the control complexity of the backlight module is reduced.
在另一些实施例中,参照图6所示,本申请的实施例提供了指向背光技术对应的显示设备100,显示设备100包括背光模组40以及显示面板22,还包括设置于背光模组40与显示面板22之间的光学模组60,其中光学模组60包括菲涅尔透镜、柱透镜等,用于改变通过光学模组60出射的光的方向,示例性的,光学模组60用于将背光模组40中的发光器件生成的光束指向性的通过显示面板22透射至第一观察者的左眼e1或第一观察者的右眼e2。In other embodiments, as shown in FIG. 6 , embodiments of the present application provide a display device 100 corresponding to directional backlight technology. The display device 100 includes a backlight module 40 and a display panel 22 , and also includes a backlight module 40 and a display panel 22 . The optical module 60 is between the display panel 22 and the display panel 22 . The optical module 60 includes a Fresnel lens, a cylindrical lens, etc., and is used to change the direction of the light emitted through the optical module 60 . For example, the optical module 60 uses The light beam generated by the light-emitting device in the backlight module 40 is transmitted through the display panel 22 to the left eye e1 of the first observer or the right eye e2 of the first observer.
对于指向背光技术而言,其图像帧的切换方式为左眼图像帧、右眼图像帧、左眼图像帧、右眼图像帧…,那么,显示设备100中的背光模组40,其背光控制信号的切换方式为左眼图像帧的背光控制信号、右眼图像帧的背光控制信号、左眼图像帧的背光控制信号、右眼图像帧的背光控制信号…。For directional backlight technology, the switching method of image frames is left eye image frame, right eye image frame, left eye image frame, right eye image frame..., then, the backlight module 40 in the display device 100, its backlight control The signal switching method is the backlight control signal of the left eye image frame, the backlight control signal of the right eye image frame, the backlight control signal of the left eye image frame, the backlight control signal of the right eye image frame...
其中,第一图像帧可以是左眼图像帧,第一背光控制信号就是左眼图像帧的背光控制信号,第一背光控制信号对应的开关状态为开启的发光器件生成第一光束,第一光束透射至左眼;第二图像帧可以是右眼图像帧,第二背光控制信号就是右眼图像帧的背光控制信号,第二背光控制信号对应的开关状态为开启的发光器件生成第二光束,第二光束透射至左眼。Wherein, the first image frame may be a left-eye image frame, the first backlight control signal is the backlight control signal of the left-eye image frame, and the switch state corresponding to the first backlight control signal is that the light-emitting device that is turned on generates the first light beam, and the first light beam Transmitted to the left eye; the second image frame may be a right eye image frame, the second backlight control signal is the backlight control signal of the right eye image frame, and the switch state corresponding to the second backlight control signal is that the light-emitting device that is turned on generates the second light beam, The second beam is transmitted to the left eye.
或者,第一图像帧可以是右眼图像帧,第一背光控制信号就是右眼图像帧的背光控制信号,第一背光控制信号对应的开关状态为开启的发光器件生成第一光束,第一光束透射至右眼;第二图像帧可以是左眼图像帧,第二背光控制信号就是左眼图像帧的背光控制信号,第二背光控制信号对应的开关状态为开启的发光器件生成第二光束,第二光束透射至左眼。Alternatively, the first image frame may be a right-eye image frame, and the first backlight control signal is the backlight control signal of the right-eye image frame. The switch state corresponding to the first backlight control signal is that the light-emitting device that is turned on generates the first light beam. Transmitted to the right eye; the second image frame can be the left eye image frame, the second backlight control signal is the backlight control signal of the left eye image frame, and the switch state corresponding to the second backlight control signal is that the light-emitting device that is turned on generates the second light beam, The second beam is transmitted to the left eye.
示例性的,图6中的观察者为第一观察者,第一观察者的左眼e1接收左眼图像,第一观察者的右眼e2接收右眼图像。对第一观察者而言,例如相邻的三帧为右眼图像帧、左眼图像帧、右眼图像帧,与之对应的相邻的三个背光控制信号为右眼图像帧的背光控制信号0、左眼图像帧的背光控制信号1、右眼图像帧的背光控制信号2。也就是说,显示设备100中的背光模组40中的驱动电路42获取背光控制信号1,以及背光控制信号0,背光控制信号1包括多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号,背光控制信号0包括多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号;切换背光控制信号1中与背光控制信号0中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态。以使得与背光控制信号1对应的多个发光器件中开关状态为开启的发光器件生成光束1,该光束1传输至光学模组60。光学模组60,用于改变光束1的传播方向,例如将光束1的传播方向变成指向第一观察者的左眼e1,传输至显示面板22,进而传输至第一观察者的右眼e2,也就是说光学模组60将背光模组40中的发光器件生成的对应背光控制信号1的光束1通过显示面板22透射至第一观察者的左眼e1。显示面板22,用于在光学模组60将光束1的传播方向变成指向第一观察者的左眼e1时,接收左眼图像帧,在左眼图像帧的驱动下显示面板22显示左眼图像,以使得第一观察者的左眼e1接收到左眼图像。For example, the observer in Figure 6 is a first observer, the first observer's left eye e1 receives the left eye image, and the first observer's right eye e2 receives the right eye image. For the first observer, for example, the three adjacent frames are the right eye image frame, the left eye image frame, and the right eye image frame, and the corresponding three adjacent backlight control signals are the backlight control of the right eye image frame. Signal 0, backlight control signal 1 of the left eye image frame, and backlight control signal 2 of the right eye image frame. That is to say, the driving circuit 42 in the backlight module 40 in the display device 100 obtains the backlight control signal 1 and the backlight control signal 0. The backlight control signal 1 includes the switching signal corresponding to each light-emitting device in the plurality of light-emitting devices, The backlight control signal 0 includes a switching signal corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting devices; switching the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to a different switching signal in the backlight control signal 1 is switched. The light-emitting device whose switch state is on among the plurality of light-emitting devices corresponding to the backlight control signal 1 generates the light beam 1 , and the light beam 1 is transmitted to the optical module 60 . The optical module 60 is used to change the propagation direction of the light beam 1, for example, change the propagation direction of the light beam 1 to point to the left eye e1 of the first observer, transmit it to the display panel 22, and then transmit it to the right eye e2 of the first observer. , that is to say, the optical module 60 transmits the light beam 1 corresponding to the backlight control signal 1 generated by the light-emitting device in the backlight module 40 to the left eye e1 of the first observer through the display panel 22 . The display panel 22 is used to receive the left eye image frame when the optical module 60 changes the propagation direction of the light beam 1 to point to the left eye e1 of the first observer. The display panel 22 displays the left eye image frame driven by the left eye image frame. image so that the left eye e1 of the first observer receives the left eye image.
然后,显示设备100中的背光模组40中的驱动电路42获取背光控制信号2,以及背光 控制信号1,背光控制信号2包括多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号,背光控制信号1包括多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号;切换背光控制信号2中与背光控制信号1中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态。以使得与背光控制信号2对应的多个发光器件中开关状态为开启的发光器件生成光束2,该光束2传输至光学模组60。光学模组60,用于改变光束2的传播方向,例如将光束2的传播方向变成指向第一观察者的右眼e2,传输至显示面板22,进而传输至第一观察者的右眼e2,也就是说光学模组60将背光模组40中的发光器件生成的对应背光控制信号2的光束2通过显示面板22透射至第一观察者的右眼e2。显示面板22,用于在光学模组60将光束2的传播方向变成指向第一观察者的右眼e2时,接收右眼图像帧,在右眼图像帧的驱动下显示面板22显示右眼图像,以使得第一观察者的右眼e2接收到右眼图像。Then, the driving circuit 42 in the backlight module 40 in the display device 100 obtains the backlight control signal 2, and the backlight The control signal 1 and the backlight control signal 2 include a switching signal corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting devices. The backlight control signal 1 includes a switching signal corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting devices; switching the backlight control signal 2 The switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to different switching signals in the backlight control signal 1. The light-emitting device whose switch state is on among the plurality of light-emitting devices corresponding to the backlight control signal 2 generates the light beam 2 , and the light beam 2 is transmitted to the optical module 60 . The optical module 60 is used to change the propagation direction of the light beam 2, for example, change the propagation direction of the light beam 2 to point toward the right eye e2 of the first observer, transmit it to the display panel 22, and then transmit it to the right eye e2 of the first observer. , that is to say, the optical module 60 transmits the light beam 2 corresponding to the backlight control signal 2 generated by the light-emitting device in the backlight module 40 to the right eye e2 of the first observer through the display panel 22 . The display panel 22 is used to receive the right eye image frame when the optical module 60 changes the propagation direction of the light beam 2 to point to the right eye e2 of the first observer. The display panel 22 displays the right eye image frame driven by the right eye image frame. image so that the right eye e2 of the first observer receives the right eye image.
在左眼图像与右眼图像的显示时间间隔比较小时,观察者的左眼接收到左眼图像,观察者的右眼接收到右眼图像,基于视觉暂留原理,观察者的眼睛相当于同时接收到左眼图像以及右眼图像,且观察者接收到的左眼图像与右眼图像存在视差信息,观察者在其大脑中对左眼图像以及右眼图像进行图像融合,然后再进行深度重建,最后立体成像,使得观察者观看到立体图像。When the display time interval between the left eye image and the right eye image is relatively small, the observer's left eye receives the left eye image, and the observer's right eye receives the right eye image. Based on the principle of persistence of vision, the observer's eyes are equivalent to simultaneously The left eye image and the right eye image are received, and there is disparity information between the left eye image and the right eye image received by the observer. The observer performs image fusion on the left eye image and the right eye image in his brain, and then performs depth reconstruction. , and finally stereoscopic imaging, allowing the observer to view a stereoscopic image.
在指向背光技术中,相邻的几十帧图像帧甚至几百帧图像帧的背光控制信号之间关联很大,而且切换速度很快,那么根据将第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号与第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号进行对比,切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,这样使得指向背光技术中每次需要切换开关状态的发光器件的数量减少,因此切换的速度将变快,也不容易造成发光器件在短时间内闪烁的问题,提升控制效率。In directional backlight technology, the backlight control signals of dozens of adjacent image frames or even hundreds of image frames are closely related, and the switching speed is very fast, then according to the first backlight control signal of the first image frame and Compare the second backlight control signal of the second image frame, and switch the switch state of the light-emitting device corresponding to the different switch signal in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal. This makes it necessary to switch the switch each time in the pointing backlight technology. The number of light-emitting devices in the state is reduced, so the switching speed will be faster, and it will not easily cause the problem of light-emitting devices flickering in a short time, improving control efficiency.
由于不同位置的观察者可以观看到的图像不同,那么,在图6所示的显示面板22需要向预定位置的观察者显示预定的3D图像时,往往会在显示面板22上设置人眼检测装置,人眼检测装置包括设置于显示面板22上的一个或多个摄像头,例如如图6所示,人眼检测装置设置于显示面板22的中间,人眼检测装置可以是双目摄像头,人眼检测装置具有视场角;人眼检测装置,用于检测第一观察者的人眼位置,根据第一观察者的人眼位置生成第一背光控制信号,第一观察者的人眼为第一观察者的左眼或右眼,第一观察者的人眼位置由第一观察者的人眼在视场角中的角度、以及第一观察者的人眼与显示设备100中的显示面板22的距离确定。Since observers at different positions can view different images, when the display panel 22 shown in FIG. 6 needs to display a predetermined 3D image to observers at a predetermined position, a human eye detection device is often provided on the display panel 22 The human eye detection device includes one or more cameras arranged on the display panel 22. For example, as shown in Figure 6, the human eye detection device is arranged in the middle of the display panel 22. The human eye detection device may be a binocular camera. The human eye detection device may be a binocular camera. The detection device has a field of view; the human eye detection device is used to detect the human eye position of the first observer, and generate the first backlight control signal according to the human eye position of the first observer, and the human eye of the first observer is the first The observer's left eye or right eye, the first observer's human eye position is determined by the angle of the first observer's human eye in the field of view, and the first observer's human eye and the display panel 22 in the display device 100 The distance is determined.
例如,参照图7所示,人眼检测装置44设置于显示面板22中间,人眼检测装置44检测第一观察者的人眼位置,且人眼检测装置44本身不转动。第一观察者的人眼可以是第一观察者的左眼e1或者第一观察者的右眼e2,第一观察者的人眼位置的是第一观察者的左眼e1的位置或者第一观察者的右眼e2的位置,其中,在人眼检测装置44检测第一观察者的左眼e1的位置时,人眼检测装置44发出预定方向的光线,测得第一观察者的左眼e1距离显示面板22的距离为s1,该预定方向与人眼检测装置44的视场角α的角平分线呈β角,且人眼检测装置44的视场角α的角平分线与显示面板22之间的夹角为γ。那么根据上述的距离s1以及γ-β的差值,即可算出第一观察者的左眼e1与显示面板22的垂直距离。For example, as shown in FIG. 7 , the human eye detection device 44 is disposed in the middle of the display panel 22 . The human eye detection device 44 detects the position of the first observer's human eyes, and the human eye detection device 44 itself does not rotate. The human eye of the first observer may be the left eye e1 of the first observer or the right eye e2 of the first observer. The position of the human eye of the first observer is the position of the left eye e1 of the first observer or the first human eye of the first observer. The position of the observer's right eye e2. When the human eye detection device 44 detects the position of the first observer's left eye e1, the human eye detection device 44 emits light in a predetermined direction to detect the first observer's left eye. The distance between e1 and the display panel 22 is s1. The predetermined direction forms an angle β with the angular bisector of the field of view α of the human eye detection device 44, and the angular bisector of the field of view α of the human eye detection device 44 is in contact with the display panel. The angle between 22 is γ. Then, based on the above-mentioned distance s1 and the difference of γ-β, the vertical distance between the first observer's left eye e1 and the display panel 22 can be calculated.
按照上述类似的方式测得第一观察者的右眼e2的位置,并且,为了确保检测的准确性,往往是在较短的时间内检测第一观察者的左眼e1的位置与第一观察者的右眼e2的位置,例如拍摄一幅第一观察者的图像进而测得这一幅第一观察者的图像中第一观察者的左眼e1的 位置与第一观察者的右眼e2的位置。The position of the first observer's right eye e2 is measured in a similar manner as above, and, in order to ensure the accuracy of the detection, the position of the first observer's left eye e1 is often detected within a short period of time. The position of the observer's right eye e2, for example, take an image of the first observer and then measure the position of the first observer's left eye e1 in the image of the first observer. The position is the same as the position of the first observer's right eye e2.
或者,参照图8所示,人眼检测装置44设置于显示面板22中间,人眼检测装置44检测第一观察者的人眼位置,且人眼检测装置44会转动。第一观察者的人眼可以是第一观察者的左眼e1或者第一观察者的右眼e2,第一观察者的人眼位置可以是第一观察者的左眼e1的位置或者第一观察者的右眼e2的位置,其中,在人眼检测装置44检测第一观察者的左眼e1的位置时,人眼检测装置44发出预定方向的光线,测得观察者的左眼e1距离显示面板22的距离为s1,该预定方向为人眼检测装置的视场角α的角平分线的方向,也就是人眼检测装置44将其视场角α的角平分线转动以指向第一观察者的左眼e1,其中,人眼检测装置44的视场角α的角平分线与显示面板之间的夹角为γ。那么根据上述的距离s1以及γ的差值,即可算出第一观察者的左眼e1与显示面板22的垂直距离。Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 8 , the human eye detection device 44 is disposed in the middle of the display panel 22 . The human eye detection device 44 detects the position of the first observer's human eyes, and the human eye detection device 44 rotates. The first observer's human eye may be the first observer's left eye e1 or the first observer's right eye e2, and the first observer's human eye position may be the position of the first observer's left eye e1 or the first observer's right eye e2. The position of the observer's right eye e2. When the human eye detection device 44 detects the position of the first observer's left eye e1, the human eye detection device 44 emits light in a predetermined direction and measures the distance of the observer's left eye e1. The distance between the display panel 22 is s1, and the predetermined direction is the direction of the angular bisector of the visual field angle α of the human eye detection device, that is, the human eye detection device 44 rotates the angular bisector of the visual field angle α to point to the first observation The angle bisector of the viewing angle α of the human eye detection device 44 and the display panel is γ. Then, based on the difference between the above distance s1 and γ, the vertical distance between the first observer's left eye e1 and the display panel 22 can be calculated.
按照上述类似的方式测得第一观察者的右眼e2的位置。The position of the first observer's right eye e2 is measured in a similar manner as above.
其中,人眼检测装置44中的摄像头可以是一个双目摄像头或者两个单目摄像头,双目摄像头或者两个单目摄像头测距可以参考现有技术中的内容在此不赘述。Among them, the camera in the human eye detection device 44 can be a binocular camera or two monocular cameras. For distance measurement of the binocular camera or two monocular cameras, refer to the content in the prior art and will not be described again here.
示例性的,例如背光模组40中的灯板上设置有如图4所示的4个发光器件,分别是发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4,其中,第一观察者的人眼位置可以是第一观察者的左眼e1的位置,且第一观察者的左眼e1的位置与发光器件L1和发光器件L2开启、发光器件L3和发光器件L4关闭存在映射关系,那么第一观察者的左眼图像的背光控制信号1中的4个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态为B=(1,1,0,0)。B=(1,1,0,0)中的元素按照从左到右的顺序依次为发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4的开关状态。For example, the light panel in the backlight module 40 is provided with four light-emitting devices as shown in FIG. 4 , namely the light-emitting device L1 , the light-emitting device L2 , the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 , wherein the first observer The position of the human eye may be the position of the first observer's left eye e1, and there is a mapping relationship between the position of the first observer's left eye e1 and the turning on of the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L2, and the turning off of the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4, Then the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to the four switching signals in the backlight control signal 1 of the left eye image of the first observer are B=(1,1,0,0). The elements in B=(1,1,0,0) are the switching states of the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 in order from left to right.
且人眼检测装置检测第一观察者的右眼e2的位置,且第一观察者的右眼e2的位置与发光器件L3和发光器件L4开启、发光器件L1和发光器件L2关闭存在映射关系,那么第一观察者的右眼图像的背光控制信号2中的4个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态为B=(0,0,1,1)。B=(0,0,1,1)中的元素按照从左到右的顺序依次为发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4的开关状态。And the human eye detection device detects the position of the first observer's right eye e2, and there is a mapping relationship between the position of the first observer's right eye e2 and the turning on of the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4, and the turning off of the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L2, Then the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to the four switching signals in the backlight control signal 2 of the first observer's right eye image are B=(0,0,1,1). The elements in B=(0,0,1,1) are the switching states of the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 in order from left to right.
在另一些实施例中,参照图9所示,可以是两个观察者同时观看3D图像,其中第一观察者的左眼e1,右眼e2,第二观察者的左眼e3,右眼e4,在两个观察者同时观看3D图像时,可以按照显示第一个观察者的左眼图像,第一个观察者的右眼图像,第二个观察者的左眼图像,第二个观察者的右眼图像,第一个观察者的左眼图像,第一个观察者的右眼图像,第二个观察者的左眼图像,第二个观察者的右眼图像…依次使得每一个观察者观看到3D图像。例如,人眼检测装置检测第一观察者的人眼位置,第一观察者的人眼可以是第一观察者的左眼e1或者第一观察者的右眼e2,第一观察者的人眼位置可以是第一观察者的左眼e1的位置或者第一观察者的右眼e2的位置,人眼检测装置也检测第二观察者的人眼位置,第二观察者的人眼可以是第二观察者的左眼e3或者第二观察者的右眼e4,第二观察者的人眼位置可以是第二观察者的左眼e3的位置或者第二观察者的右眼e4的位置。其中,第一观察者的左眼e1的位置对应的背光控制信号为第一个背光控制信号,第一观察者的右眼e2的位置对应的背光控制信号为第二个背光控制信号,第二观察者的左眼e3的位置对应的背光控制信号为第三个背光控制信号,第二观察者的右眼e4的位置对应的背光控制信号为第四个背光控制信号,那么在使得第一个观察者与第二个观察者各自观看到一幅3D图像时,其背光控制信号的刷新方式为第一个背光控制信号、第二个背光控制信号、第三个背光控制信号、第四个背光控制信 号,其图像帧的刷新方式为第一观察者的左眼图像帧、第一观察者的右眼图像帧、第二观察者的左眼图像帧、第二观察者的右眼图像帧。2个观察者观看3D图像的背光刷新速率以及图像刷新速率要相较于一个观察者观看3D图像时快2倍。In other embodiments, as shown in FIG. 9 , two observers may watch the 3D image at the same time, where the first observer's left eye e1 and right eye e2 and the second observer's left eye e3 and right eye e4 , when two observers watch a 3D image at the same time, the left eye image of the first observer, the right eye image of the first observer, the left eye image of the second observer, and the left eye image of the second observer can be displayed as follows. The right eye image of the first observer, the left eye image of the first observer, the right eye image of the first observer, the left eye image of the second observer, the right eye image of the second observer... in turn make each observation Viewers can view 3D images. For example, the human eye detection device detects the position of the human eye of the first observer. The human eye of the first observer may be the left eye e1 of the first observer or the right eye e2 of the first observer. The human eye of the first observer The position may be the position of the first observer's left eye e1 or the position of the first observer's right eye e2. The human eye detection device also detects the position of the second observer's human eye. The second observer's human eye may be the position of the first observer's right eye e2. The left eye e3 of the second observer or the right eye e4 of the second observer, the human eye position of the second observer may be the position of the left eye e3 of the second observer or the position of the right eye e4 of the second observer. Among them, the backlight control signal corresponding to the position of the first observer's left eye e1 is the first backlight control signal, and the backlight control signal corresponding to the position of the first observer's right eye e2 is the second backlight control signal. The backlight control signal corresponding to the position of the observer's left eye e3 is the third backlight control signal, and the backlight control signal corresponding to the position of the second observer's right eye e4 is the fourth backlight control signal, then the first When the observer and the second observer each view a 3D image, the refresh method of the backlight control signal is the first backlight control signal, the second backlight control signal, the third backlight control signal, and the fourth backlight control signal. control letter No., the refresh method of the image frames is the left eye image frame of the first observer, the right eye image frame of the first observer, the left eye image frame of the second observer, and the right eye image frame of the second observer. The backlight refresh rate and image refresh rate when two observers watch a 3D image are twice as fast as when one observer watches a 3D image.
在另一种可能实现的方式中,可以按照显示第一观察者的左眼图像与第二观察者的左眼图像,第一观察者的右眼图像与第二观察者的右眼图像,第一观察者的左眼图像与第二观察者的左眼图像,第一观察者的右眼图像与第二观察者的右眼图像…使得每一个观察者看到3D图像。In another possible implementation manner, the left eye image of the first observer and the left eye image of the second observer, the right eye image of the first observer and the right eye image of the second observer can be displayed as follows. The left eye image of one observer and the left eye image of the second observer, the right eye image of the first observer and the right eye image of the second observer... enable each observer to see a 3D image.
示例性的,图9中包括第一观察者与第二观察者,第一观察者的左眼e1接收左眼图像,第一观察者的右眼e2接收右眼图像,第二观察者的左眼e3接收左眼图像,第二观察者的右眼e4接收右眼图像。例如相邻的三帧为第一观察者的右眼图像帧与第二观察者的右眼图像帧、第一观察者的左眼图像帧与第二观察者的左眼图像帧、第一观察者的右眼图像帧与第二观察者的右眼图像帧,与之对应的相邻的三个背光控制信号为第一观察者的右眼图像帧与第二观察者的右眼图像帧共同的背光控制信号4、第一观察者的左眼图像帧与第二观察者的左眼图像帧共同的背光控制信号5、第一观察者的右眼图像帧与第二观察者的右眼图像帧共同的背光控制信号6。此时,两个图像帧对应的背光控制信号相同。For example, Figure 9 includes a first observer and a second observer. The first observer's left eye e1 receives the left eye image, the first observer's right eye e2 receives the right eye image, and the second observer's left eye e1 receives the left eye image. Eye e3 receives the left eye image, and the second observer's right eye e4 receives the right eye image. For example, the three adjacent frames are the right eye image frame of the first observer and the right eye image frame of the second observer, the left eye image frame of the first observer and the left eye image frame of the second observer, and the first observation frame. The right eye image frame of the first observer and the right eye image frame of the second observer, and the corresponding three adjacent backlight control signals are the right eye image frame of the first observer and the right eye image frame of the second observer. The backlight control signal 4, the backlight control signal 5 common to the left eye image frame of the first observer and the left eye image frame of the second observer, the right eye image frame of the first observer and the right eye image of the second observer Frame common backlight control signal 6. At this time, the backlight control signals corresponding to the two image frames are the same.
在需要显示第一观察者的左眼图像与第二观察者的左眼图像时,人眼检测装置,用于检测第一观察者的人眼位置,根据第一观察者的人眼位置生成子背光控制信号51,第一观察者的人眼为第一观察者的左眼或右眼,第一观察者的人眼位置由第一观察者的人眼在人眼检测装置的视场角中的角度、以及第一观察者的人眼与显示设备中的显示面板的距离确定。其中第一观察者的人眼位置可以是第一观察者的左眼e1的位置,那么,根据第一个观察者的左眼e1的位置生成子背光控制信号51,其中第一观察者的左眼e1的位置与多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号存在预定的映射关系。示例性的,背光模组40中的灯板上设置有如图4所示的4个发光器件,分别是发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4,其中第一观察者的左眼e1的位置与发光器件L1和发光器件L2开启、发光器件L3和发光器件L4关闭存在映射关系,那么子背光控制信号51中的4个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态为B51=(1,1,0,0)。B51=(1,1,0,0)中的元素按照从左到右的顺序依次为发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4的开关状态。When it is necessary to display the left eye image of the first observer and the left eye image of the second observer, the human eye detection device is used to detect the human eye position of the first observer, and generate a child according to the human eye position of the first observer. Backlight control signal 51, the first observer's human eye is the first observer's left eye or right eye, and the first observer's human eye position is determined by the first observer's human eye in the field of view of the human eye detection device The angle and the distance between the human eyes of the first observer and the display panel in the display device are determined. The human eye position of the first observer may be the position of the first observer's left eye e1. Then, the sub-backlight control signal 51 is generated according to the position of the first observer's left eye e1, where the first observer's left eye There is a predetermined mapping relationship between the position of the eye e1 and the switching signal corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting devices. Exemplarily, the light panel in the backlight module 40 is provided with four light-emitting devices as shown in FIG. 4 , namely the light-emitting device L1 , the light-emitting device L2 , the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 , in which the left side of the first observer There is a mapping relationship between the position of the eye e1 and the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L2 being turned on and the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 being turned off. Then the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to the four switching signals in the sub-backlight control signal 51 is B51=(1 ,1,0,0). The elements in B51=(1,1,0,0) are the switching states of the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 in order from left to right.
人眼检测装置,还用于检测第二观察者的人眼位置,根据第二观察者的人眼位置生成子背光控制信号52,第二观察者的人眼为第二观察者的左眼或右眼,第二观察者的人眼位置由第二观察者的人眼在人眼检测装置的视场角中的角度、以及第二观察者的人眼与显示设备中的显示面板的距离确定,其中第二观察者的人眼位置可以是第二观察者的左眼e3的位置,那么,根据第二观察者的左眼e3的位置生成子背光控制信号52,其中第二观察者的左眼e3的位置与多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号存在预定的映射关系。示例性的,背光模组40中的灯板上设置有如图4所示的4个发光器件,分别是发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4,其中第二观察者的左眼e3的位置与发光器件L2和发光器件L3开启、发光器件L1和发光器件L4关闭存在映射关系,那么子背光控制信号12中的4个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态为B52=(0,1,1,0)。B52=(0,1,1,0)中的元素按照从左到右的顺序依次为发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4的开关状态。The human eye detection device is also used to detect the human eye position of the second observer, and generate the sub-backlight control signal 52 according to the human eye position of the second observer. The human eye of the second observer is the left eye or the left eye of the second observer. The right eye, the human eye position of the second observer is determined by the angle of the second observer's human eye in the field of view of the human eye detection device, and the distance between the second observer's human eye and the display panel in the display device , where the human eye position of the second observer may be the position of the second observer's left eye e3, then the sub-backlight control signal 52 is generated according to the position of the second observer's left eye e3, where the second observer's left eye e3 There is a predetermined mapping relationship between the position of the eye e3 and the switching signal corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting devices. Exemplarily, the light panel in the backlight module 40 is provided with four light-emitting devices as shown in FIG. 4 , namely the light-emitting device L1 , the light-emitting device L2 , the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 , in which the left side of the second observer There is a mapping relationship between the position of eye e3 and the turning on of light-emitting device L2 and light-emitting device L3, and the turning off of light-emitting device L1 and light-emitting device L4. Then the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to the four switching signals in the sub-backlight control signal 12 is B52 = (0 ,1,1,0). The elements in B52=(0,1,1,0) are the switching states of the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 in order from left to right.
人眼检测装置,还用于根据子背光控制信号51与子背光控制信号52生成第一观察者的左眼图像帧与第二观察者的左眼图像帧共同的背光控制信号5。具体的,子背光控制信号51 中发光器件L1和发光器件L2开启、发光器件L3和发光器件L4关闭,子背光控制信号52中发光器件L2和发光器件L3开启、发光器件L1和发光器件L4关闭,因此,背光控制信号5中,发光器件L1、发光器件L2和发光器件L3开启,发光器件L4关闭。驱动电路42,用于获取背光控制信号5,以及背光控制信号4,背光控制信号5包括多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号,背光控制信号4包括多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号;切换背光控制信号5中与背光控制信号4中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,以使得发光器件L1、发光器件L2以及发光器件L3发光生成光束,该光束传输至光学模组60。光学模组60可以将背光模组40中发光器件L1与发光器件L2发光生成的光束的传播方向变成指向第一观察者的左眼e1,传输至显示面板22,进而传输至第一观察者的左眼e1;光学模组60可以将背光模组40中发光器件L2与发光器件L3发光生成的光束的传播方向变成指向第二观察者的左眼e3,传输至显示面板22,进而传输至第二观察者的左眼e3。显示面板22,接收第一观察者的左眼图像帧,在第一观察者的左眼图像帧的驱动下显示面板22显示第一观察者的左眼图像,也接收第二观察者的左眼图像帧,在第二观察者的左眼图像帧的驱动下,显示面板22显示第二观察者的左眼图像,以使得第一观察者的左眼e1观看到第一观察者的左眼图像,第二观察者的左眼e3观看到第二观察者的左眼图像。The human eye detection device is also configured to generate a backlight control signal 5 common to the left eye image frame of the first observer and the left eye image frame of the second observer based on the sub-backlight control signal 51 and the sub-backlight control signal 52 . Specifically, sub-backlight control signal 51 In the sub-backlight control signal 52, the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L2 are turned on, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 are turned off, the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L3 are turned on, and the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L4 are turned off. Therefore, in the backlight control signal 5 , the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L3 are turned on, and the light-emitting device L4 is turned off. The driving circuit 42 is used to obtain the backlight control signal 5 and the backlight control signal 4. The backlight control signal 5 includes a switching signal corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting devices. The backlight control signal 4 includes a switch signal corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting devices. A switching signal corresponding to a light-emitting device; switching the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to a different switching signal in the backlight control signal 5 in the backlight control signal 5, so that the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L3 emit light to generate a light beam. The light beam is transmitted to optical module 60. The optical module 60 can change the propagation direction of the light beam generated by the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L2 in the backlight module 40 to point toward the left eye e1 of the first observer, transmit it to the display panel 22 , and then transmit it to the first observer. The optical module 60 can change the propagation direction of the light beam generated by the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L3 in the backlight module 40 to point to the left eye e3 of the second observer, and transmit it to the display panel 22, and then transmit it To the second observer's left eye e3. The display panel 22 receives the left eye image frame of the first observer. Driven by the left eye image frame of the first observer, the display panel 22 displays the left eye image of the first observer and also receives the left eye image of the second observer. Image frame, driven by the left eye image frame of the second observer, the display panel 22 displays the left eye image of the second observer, so that the left eye e1 of the first observer views the left eye image of the first observer , the second observer's left eye e3 views the second observer's left eye image.
然后,第一观察者的人眼位置也可以是第一观察者右眼e2的位置,根据第一观察者的右眼e2的位置,生成子背光控制信号61,子背光控制信号61中的4个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态为B61=(0,1,1,0)。B61=(0,1,1,0)中的元素按照从左到右的顺序依次为发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4的开关状态。第二观察者的人眼位置也可以是第二观察者右眼e4的位置,根据第二观察者的右眼e4的位置,生成子背光控制信号62,子背光控制信号62中的4个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态为B62=(0,0,1,1)。B62=(0,0,1,1)中的元素按照从左到右的顺序依次为发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4的开关状态。人眼检测装置,还用于根据子背光控制信号61与子背光控制信号62生成背光控制信号6。具体的,子背光控制信号61中发光器件L2和发光器件L3开启、发光器件L1和发光器件L4关闭,子背光控制信号62中发光器件L3和发光器件L4开启、发光器件L1和发光器件L2关闭,因此,背光控制信号6中,发光器件L2、发光器件L3和发光器件L4开启,发光器件L1关闭。驱动电路42,用于获取背光控制信号6,以及背光控制信号5,背光控制信号6包括多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号,背光控制信号5包括多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号;切换背光控制信号6中与背光控制信号5中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,由于背光控制信号5中,发光器件L1、发光器件L2和发光器件L3开启,发光器件L4关闭,因此也就是切换发光器件L1以及发光器件L4的开关状态,以使得发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4发光生成光束,该光束传输至光学模组60。光学模组60可以将背光模组40中发光器件L2与发光器件L3发光生成的光束的传播方向变成指向第一观察者的右眼e2,传输至显示面板22,进而传输至第一观察者的右眼e2;光学模组60可以将背光模组40中发光器件L3与发光器件L4发光生成的光束的传播方向变成指向第二观察者的右眼e4,传输至显示面板22,进而传输至第二观察者的右眼e4。显示面板22,接收第一观察者的右眼图像帧,在第一观察者的右眼图像帧的驱动下显示面板22显示第一观察者的右眼图像,也接收第二观察者的右眼图像帧,在第二观察者的右眼图像帧的驱动下显示面板22显示第二观察者的右眼图像,以使得第一观察者的右眼e2观看到第一观察者的右眼图像,第二观察者的右眼e4观看到第二观察者 的右眼图像。进而实现在一次刷新过程中,显示不同的观察者的不同两幅左眼图像或者不同两幅右眼图像。Then, the human eye position of the first observer may also be the position of the first observer's right eye e2. According to the position of the first observer's right eye e2, the sub-backlight control signal 61 is generated, and 4 of the sub-backlight control signal 61 is generated. The switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to each switching signal is B61=(0,1,1,0). The elements in B61=(0,1,1,0) are the switching states of the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 in order from left to right. The human eye position of the second observer can also be the position of the second observer's right eye e4. According to the position of the second observer's right eye e4, the sub-backlight control signal 62 is generated. The four switches in the sub-backlight control signal 62 The switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to the signal is B62=(0,0,1,1). The elements in B62=(0,0,1,1) are the switching states of the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 in order from left to right. The human eye detection device is also used to generate the backlight control signal 6 according to the sub-backlight control signal 61 and the sub-backlight control signal 62 . Specifically, in the sub-backlight control signal 61, the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L3 are turned on, and the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L4 are turned off. In the sub-backlight control signal 62, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 are turned on, and the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L2 are turned off. , therefore, in the backlight control signal 6, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 are turned on, and the light-emitting device L1 is turned off. The driving circuit 42 is used to obtain the backlight control signal 6 and the backlight control signal 5. The backlight control signal 6 includes a switching signal corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting devices, and the backlight control signal 5 includes a switch signal corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting devices. A switching signal corresponding to a light-emitting device; switching the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to a different switching signal in the backlight control signal 5 in the backlight control signal 6, because in the backlight control signal 5, the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L3 When the light-emitting device L4 is turned on, the light-emitting device L4 is turned off. Therefore, the switching state of the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L4 is switched, so that the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 emit light to generate a light beam, which is transmitted to the optical module 60 . The optical module 60 can change the propagation direction of the light beam generated by the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L3 in the backlight module 40 to point toward the right eye e2 of the first observer, and transmit it to the display panel 22 and then to the first observer. The optical module 60 can change the propagation direction of the light beam generated by the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 in the backlight module 40 to point to the right eye e4 of the second observer, transmit it to the display panel 22, and then transmit it to the display panel 22. To the second observer's right eye e4. The display panel 22 receives the right eye image frame of the first observer. Driven by the right eye image frame of the first observer, the display panel 22 displays the right eye image of the first observer and also receives the right eye image of the second observer. Image frame, the display panel 22 displays the right eye image of the second observer driven by the right eye image frame of the second observer, so that the right eye e2 of the first observer views the right eye image of the first observer, The second observer's right eye e4 sees the second observer image of the right eye. Then, in one refresh process, two different left-eye images or two different right-eye images of different observers can be displayed.
在一些实施例中,参照图10所示,显示设备100包括显示面板22以及控制电路70,控制电路70与显示面板22连接,控制电路70与驱动电路42连接;控制电路70用于将第一图像帧与第二图像帧进行对比,确定显示面板中的至少一个像素组,其中,至少一个像素组中的每一个像素组内,与第一图像帧对应的赋值的像素点和与第二图像帧对应的赋值的像素点之差大于预定值;还用于获取至少一个像素组中每一个像素组对应的第一背光控制信号。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 10 , the display device 100 includes a display panel 22 and a control circuit 70 , the control circuit 70 is connected to the display panel 22 , and the control circuit 70 is connected to the driving circuit 42 ; the control circuit 70 is used to control the first The image frame is compared with the second image frame to determine at least one pixel group in the display panel, wherein in each pixel group of the at least one pixel group, the assigned pixel point corresponding to the first image frame and the second image The difference between the assigned pixel points corresponding to the frame is greater than a predetermined value; it is also used to obtain the first backlight control signal corresponding to each pixel group in at least one pixel group.
示例性的,显示设备100还包括存储器,控制电路70连接存储器,控制电路70也连接人眼检测装置,人眼检测装置将检测到的第一观察者的人眼位置传输至控制电路70,由控制电路70根据第一观察者的人眼位置在存储器中查找,与当前的第一观察者的人眼位置存在映射关系的多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号,生成背光控制信号并传输至背光模组40中的驱动电路42,或者,控制电路70根据第一观察者的人眼位置计算,与当前的第一观察者的人眼位置存在映射关系的多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号,生成背光控制信号并传输至背光模组40中的驱动电路42。在另一些实施例中,也可以是控制电路70获取第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号,以及第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号,其中,第一背光控制信号包括多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号,第二图像帧为第一图像帧的前一图像帧,第二背光控制信号包括多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号;控制电路70确定第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号,将第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号传输至驱动电路42,驱动电路42用于切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态。Exemplarily, the display device 100 further includes a memory. The control circuit 70 is connected to the memory. The control circuit 70 is also connected to a human eye detection device. The human eye detection device transmits the detected human eye position of the first observer to the control circuit 70 . The control circuit 70 searches the memory for a switching signal corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting devices that has a mapping relationship with the current eye position of the first observer in the memory, and generates a backlight control The signal is transmitted to the driving circuit 42 in the backlight module 40, or the control circuit 70 calculates according to the human eye position of the first observer, among the multiple light-emitting devices that have a mapping relationship with the current human eye position of the first observer. The switching signal corresponding to each light-emitting device is used to generate a backlight control signal and transmit it to the driving circuit 42 in the backlight module 40 . In other embodiments, the control circuit 70 may also obtain the first backlight control signal of the first image frame and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame, where the first backlight control signal includes a plurality of light-emitting devices. a switching signal corresponding to each light-emitting device, the second image frame is the previous image frame of the first image frame, and the second backlight control signal includes a switching signal corresponding to each light-emitting device in the plurality of light-emitting devices; the control circuit 70 determines The different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal are transmitted to the driving circuit 42 , and the driving circuit 42 is used to switch the first backlight control signal. The switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to the different switching signals in the second backlight control signal in the backlight control signal.
示例性的,如图11所示,在图11所示的显示面板22中,显示面板22包括阵列分布的128*128阵列分布的像素点,其中,阵列分布的像素点被分为4*4个像素组,每一个像素组中包括32*32个像素点,按照图11所示的排列方式,从上到下的顺序依次为第一行像素组,第二行像素组,第三行像素组以及第四行像素组,每一行像素组中从左到右依次是第一列像素组,第二列像素组,第三列像素组以及第四列像素组。第一图像帧与第二图像帧为相邻的两个图像帧,第二图像帧为第一图像帧的前一图像帧。其中,在显示第一图像帧对应的图像时,控制电路70获取第一图像帧,例如,第一图像帧对应的在第一行的4列像素组中赋值的像素点的数量分别为543、766、852、19,在第二行的4列像素组中赋值的像素点的数量分别为765、109、654、98,在第三行的4列像素组中赋值的像素点的数量分别为900、124、876、582,在第四行的4列像素组中赋值的像素点的数量分别为988、187、234、199。在显示第二图像帧对应的图像时,控制电路70获取第二图像帧,例如,第二图像帧在第一行的4列像素组中赋值的像素点的数量分别为599、966、768、30,在第二行的4列像素组中赋值的像素点的数量分别为865、200、740、376,在第三行的4列像素组中赋值的像素点的数量分别为876、212、890、600,在第四行的4列像素组中赋值的像素点的数量分别为1000、224、890、100。For example, as shown in FIG. 11 , in the display panel 22 shown in FIG. 11 , the display panel 22 includes 128*128 array distributed pixel points, wherein the array distributed pixel points are divided into 4*4 Each pixel group includes 32*32 pixels. According to the arrangement shown in Figure 11, the order from top to bottom is the first row of pixel groups, the second row of pixel groups, and the third row of pixels. group and the fourth row of pixel groups. From left to right in each row of pixel groups are the first column of pixel groups, the second column of pixel groups, the third column of pixel groups and the fourth column of pixel groups. The first image frame and the second image frame are two adjacent image frames, and the second image frame is the previous image frame of the first image frame. When displaying the image corresponding to the first image frame, the control circuit 70 obtains the first image frame. For example, the number of pixel points assigned in the 4-column pixel group of the first row corresponding to the first image frame are 543, 766, 852, 19, the number of pixels assigned in the 4-column pixel group in the second row are 765, 109, 654, 98 respectively, and the number of pixels assigned in the 4-column pixel group in the third row are respectively 900, 124, 876, 582. The numbers of pixels assigned in the 4-column pixel group of the fourth row are 988, 187, 234, and 199 respectively. When displaying the image corresponding to the second image frame, the control circuit 70 obtains the second image frame. For example, the numbers of pixel points assigned to the 4-column pixel group of the first row of the second image frame are 599, 966, 768, 30. The number of pixels assigned in the 4-column pixel group in the second row are 865, 200, 740, and 376 respectively. The number of pixels assigned in the 4-column pixel group in the third row are 876, 212, 890, 600, the number of pixels assigned in the 4-column pixel group of the fourth row are 1000, 224, 890, and 100 respectively.
其中,控制电路70比较第一行的4列像素组中,与第一图像帧对应的赋值的像素点的数量和与第二图像帧对应的赋值的像素点的数量之差分别为56、200、84、11;控制电路70比较第二行的4列像素组中,与第一图像帧对应的赋值的像素点的数量和与第二图像帧对应的赋值的像素点的数量之差分别为100、91、86、278;控制电路70比较第三行的4列像素组 中,与第一图像帧对应的赋值的像素点的数量和与第二图像帧对应的赋值的像素点的数量之差分别为24、88、14、18;控制电路70比较第四行的4列像素组中,与第一图像帧对应的赋值的像素点的数量和与第二图像帧对应的赋值的像素点的数量之差分别为12、37、656、99。Among them, the control circuit 70 compares the difference between the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the first image frame and the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the second image frame in the 4-column pixel group of the first row, which are 56 and 200 respectively. , 84, 11; The control circuit 70 compares the difference between the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the first image frame and the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the second image frame in the 4-column pixel group of the second row. 100, 91, 86, 278; the control circuit 70 compares the 4-column pixel group of the third row , the differences between the number of assigned pixels corresponding to the first image frame and the number of assigned pixels corresponding to the second image frame are 24, 88, 14, and 18 respectively; the control circuit 70 compares the 4 in the fourth row In the column pixel group, the differences between the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the first image frame and the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the second image frame are 12, 37, 656, and 99 respectively.
示例性的,控制电路70确定,在一个像素组中,与第一图像帧对应的赋值的像素点的数量和与第二图像帧对应的赋值的像素点的数量之差大于预定值,该预定值可以是该像素组内的总像素点数的10%,也就是32*32*10%≈102,表明当前像素组在显示第一图像帧与显示第二图像帧时,赋值的像素点的数量差异比较大,那么该像素组可能是3D效果突出的一个像素组,可能是3D图像中出屏与入屏效果对应的像素组。而其他的像素组中,与第一图像帧对应的赋值的像素点的数量和与第二图像帧对应的赋值的像素点的数量之差小于预定值,表明当前像素组在显示第一图像帧与显示第二图像帧时,赋值的像素点的数量差异不大,3D效果不突出。Exemplarily, the control circuit 70 determines that in a pixel group, the difference between the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the first image frame and the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the second image frame is greater than a predetermined value. The value can be 10% of the total number of pixels in the pixel group, that is, 32*32*10%≈102, indicating the number of pixels assigned to the current pixel group when displaying the first image frame and the second image frame. If the difference is relatively large, then the pixel group may be a pixel group with outstanding 3D effect, or it may be a pixel group corresponding to the out-of-screen and in-screen effects in the 3D image. In other pixel groups, the difference between the number of assigned pixels corresponding to the first image frame and the number of assigned pixels corresponding to the second image frame is less than a predetermined value, indicating that the current pixel group is displaying the first image frame. Compared with when displaying the second image frame, the number of assigned pixels is not much different, and the 3D effect is not prominent.
其中,预定值可以是该像素组内的总像素点数的10%,或者也可以是该像素组内的总像素点数的20%,例如在显示面板的刷新速率变快时,该百分比将减小,预定值也减小,本申请的实施例对预定值不做限定。The predetermined value may be 10% of the total number of pixels in the pixel group, or it may be 20% of the total number of pixels in the pixel group. For example, when the refresh rate of the display panel becomes faster, the percentage will decrease. , the predetermined value also decreases. The embodiments of this application do not limit the predetermined value.
那么,控制电路70确定在当前的显示面板显示第一图像与第二图像时,3D效果突出的至少一个像素组包括:第一行第二列的像素组Z1,第二行第四列的像素组Z2,第四行第三列的像素组Z3。Then, the control circuit 70 determines that when the current display panel displays the first image and the second image, at least one pixel group with outstanding 3D effect includes: the pixel group Z1 in the first row and second column, and the pixel group Z1 in the second row and fourth column. Group Z2, pixel group Z3 in the fourth row and third column.
参照图12所示,在控制电路70将显示面板22中的像素点分为多个像素组时,控制电路70也将背光模组40中的多个发光器件分为多组发光器件组,且显示面板22中的一个像素组对应背光模组40中的一组发光器件组。例如,显示面板22中的第一行第二列的像素组Z1对应背光模组40中的发光器件组H1,显示面板22中的第二行第四列的像素组Z2对应背光模组40中的发光器件组H2,显示面板22中的第四行第三列的像素组Z3对应背光模组40中的发光器件组H3。其中,包含32*32的像素点的像素组对应的发光器件组,可以有32*32个发光器件,也就是每一个发光器件对应一个像素点,或者,发光器件组可以有16*16个发光器件,每一个发光器件对应4个像素点,本申请的实施例对一个发光器件对应的像素点的数量不做限定。Referring to FIG. 12 , when the control circuit 70 divides the pixels in the display panel 22 into multiple pixel groups, the control circuit 70 also divides the multiple light-emitting devices in the backlight module 40 into multiple light-emitting device groups, and One pixel group in the display panel 22 corresponds to a group of light-emitting device groups in the backlight module 40 . For example, the pixel group Z1 in the first row and second column of the display panel 22 corresponds to the light-emitting device group H1 in the backlight module 40 , and the pixel group Z2 in the second row and fourth column of the display panel 22 corresponds to the backlight module 40 The light-emitting device group H2, the pixel group Z3 in the fourth row and third column of the display panel 22 corresponds to the light-emitting device group H3 in the backlight module 40. Among them, the light-emitting device group corresponding to the pixel group containing 32*32 pixels can have 32*32 light-emitting devices, that is, each light-emitting device corresponds to one pixel, or the light-emitting device group can have 16*16 light-emitting devices. device, each light-emitting device corresponds to four pixels. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the number of pixels corresponding to one light-emitting device.
因此,控制电路70,还用于获取像素组Z1对应的发光器件组H1的第一背光控制信号,将发光器件组H1的第一背光控制信号传输至驱动电路42;获取像素组Z2对应的发光器件组H2的第一背光控制信号,将发光器件组H2的第一背光控制信号传输至驱动电路42;获取像素组Z3对应的发光器件组H3的第一背光控制信号,将发光器件组H3的第一背光控制信号传输至驱动电路42。Therefore, the control circuit 70 is also used to obtain the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H1 corresponding to the pixel group Z1, and transmit the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H1 to the driving circuit 42; and obtain the luminescence signal corresponding to the pixel group Z2. The first backlight control signal of the device group H2 is transmitted to the driving circuit 42; the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H3 corresponding to the pixel group Z3 is obtained, and the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H3 is obtained. The first backlight control signal is transmitted to the driving circuit 42 .
驱动电路42,具体用于获取像素组Z1对应的发光器件组H1的第一背光控制信号以及发光器件组H1的第二背光控制信号、像素组Z2对应的发光器件组H2的第一背光控制信号以及发光器件组H2的第二背光控制信号、以及像素组Z3对应的发光器件组H3的第一背光控制信号以及发光器件组H3的第二背光控制信号,其中,第一背光控制信号是第一图像帧的背光控制信号,第二背光控制信号是第二图像帧的背光控制信号。The driving circuit 42 is specifically used to obtain the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H1 corresponding to the pixel group Z1 and the second backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H1, and the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H2 corresponding to the pixel group Z2. and the second backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H2, the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H3 corresponding to the pixel group Z3, and the second backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H3, wherein the first backlight control signal is the first The backlight control signal of the image frame is the backlight control signal of the second image frame.
可选的,驱动电路42,将发光器件组H1的第一背光控制信号与发光器件组H1的第二背光控制信号进行对比,确定发光器件组H1的第一背光控制信号中与发光器件组H1的第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号;将发光器件组H2的第一背光控制信号以及发光器件组H2的 第二背光控制信号进行对比,确定发光器件组H2的第一背光控制信号中与发光器件组H2的第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号;将发光器件组H3的第一背光控制信号以及发光器件组H3的第二背光控制信号进行对比,确定发光器件组H3的第一背光控制信号中与发光器件组H3的第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号。Optionally, the driving circuit 42 compares the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H1 with the second backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H1, and determines whether the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H1 is consistent with the light-emitting device group H1. Different switching signals in the second backlight control signal; combine the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H2 and the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H2 The second backlight control signal is compared to determine the switch signal in the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H2 and the second backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H2; the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H3 and the lighting The second backlight control signal of the device group H3 is compared to determine the switch signal in the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H3 and the second backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H3.
驱动电路42,切换发光器件组H1的第一背光控制信号中与发光器件组H1的第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,切换发光器件组H2的第一背光控制信号中与发光器件组H2的第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,切换发光器件组H3的第一背光控制信号中与发光器件组H3的第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态。以实现在每一次切换背光控制信号时,驱动电路仅需要比较3D图像的效果比较突出的像素组对应的区域内的发光器件的背光控制信号,控制的发光器件的数量将再次减少,控制的效率将再次提升。The driving circuit 42 switches the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H1 and the second backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H1, and switches the first backlight control of the light-emitting device group H2 The switching state of the light-emitting device in the signal corresponds to a different switching signal in the second backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H2, switching the first backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H3 and the second backlight control signal of the light-emitting device group H3 Different switching signals correspond to the switching states of the light-emitting device. In order to realize that every time the backlight control signal is switched, the driving circuit only needs to compare the backlight control signals of the light-emitting devices in the area corresponding to the pixel group with a more prominent 3D image effect. The number of controlled light-emitting devices will be reduced again, and the control efficiency will be reduced again. will be promoted again.
参照图13所示,本申请的实施例还提供了一种背光控制方法,该背光控制方法应用于显示设备,其中,背光模组可以是图4所示的背光模组40,背光模组包括灯板,灯板上设置有阵列分布的多个发光器件。Referring to FIG. 13 , embodiments of the present application also provide a backlight control method, which is applied to a display device. The backlight module may be the backlight module 40 shown in FIG. 4 , and the backlight module includes A light panel is provided with a plurality of light-emitting devices distributed in an array.
背光控制方法包括:Backlight control methods include:
S101、获取第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号,以及第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号。S101. Obtain the first backlight control signal of the first image frame and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame.
其中,第一背光控制信号包括多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号,一个开关信号对应控制一个发光器件的开关状态。具体的,参照图4所示,图4中的多个发光器件是以4个发光器件为例进行说明,那么,第一背光信号中包括4个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号,并且,在显示第一图像帧对应的图像时,需要发光器件L2与发光器件L4开启,发光器件L1与发光器件L3关闭。那么,第一背光控制信号包括的4个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态可以是以矩阵形式存在,例如B=(0,1,0,1),其中,其中矩阵B=(0,1,0,1)中的元素按照从左到右的顺序依次表示发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4的开关状态。Wherein, the first backlight control signal includes a switching signal corresponding to each light-emitting device in the plurality of light-emitting devices, and one switching signal correspondingly controls the switching state of one light-emitting device. Specifically, referring to FIG. 4 , the multiple light-emitting devices in FIG. 4 are described by taking four light-emitting devices as an example. Then, the first backlight signal includes a switching signal corresponding to each of the four light-emitting devices. , and when displaying the image corresponding to the first image frame, the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L4 need to be turned on, and the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L3 need to be turned off. Then, the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to the four switching signals included in the first backlight control signal may exist in a matrix form, for example, B=(0,1,0,1), where the matrix B=(0,1 The elements in ,0,1) represent the switching states of the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 in order from left to right.
在显示第一图像帧的前一图像帧,也就是第二图像帧对应的图像时,是发光器件L1与发光器件L2开启,发光器件L3与发光器件L4关闭,其中,第二背光控制信号为第二图像帧的背光控制信号。第二背光控制信号包括发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4的开关信号各自对应的开关状态“1”、“1”、“0”、“0”。其中,第二背光控制信号中的4个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态也可以用矩阵表示,例如A=(1,1,0,0),其中矩阵A=(1,1,0,0)中的元素按照从左到右的顺序依次表示发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4的开关状态。When displaying the previous image frame of the first image frame, that is, the image corresponding to the second image frame, the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L2 are turned on, and the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 are turned off, where the second backlight control signal is Backlight control signal for the second image frame. The second backlight control signal includes switching states “1”, “1”, “0”, and “0” respectively corresponding to the switching signals of the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3, and the light-emitting device L4. Among them, the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to the four switching signals in the second backlight control signal can also be represented by a matrix, for example, A=(1,1,0,0), where the matrix A=(1,1,0, The elements in 0) represent the switching states of the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3, and the light-emitting device L4 in order from left to right.
示例性的,背光模组应用的显示设备中,显示设备的存储器的缓存中会保留待显示的图像帧的前一图像帧的背光控制信号,因此,可以从缓存中读取第二背光控制信号。For example, in a display device where the backlight module is applied, the backlight control signal of the previous image frame of the image frame to be displayed will be retained in the cache of the memory of the display device. Therefore, the second backlight control signal can be read from the cache. .
S102、切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态。S102. Switch the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal.
其中,在获取到第一背光控制信号以后,可以切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中,不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,例如根据步骤S103可知,第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号为发光器件L1对应的开关信号以及发光器件L4对应的开关信号,那么,切换发光器件L1的开关状态,具体是将发光器件L1的开关状态由开启变成关闭,切换发光器件L4的开关状态,具体是将发光器件L4的开关状态由关闭 变成开启。After obtaining the first backlight control signal, the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to the different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal can be switched. For example, according to step S103, it can be known that the first backlight control signal The switch signals in the signal that are different from the second backlight control signal are the switch signals corresponding to the light-emitting device L1 and the switch signals corresponding to the light-emitting device L4. Then, switching the switch state of the light-emitting device L1 is specifically changing the switch state of the light-emitting device L1 by On to off, switching the switch state of the light-emitting device L4, specifically changing the switch state of the light-emitting device L4 from off turns on.
在另一些实施例中,在步骤S101之后,步骤S102之前,还包括:确定第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号。In other embodiments, after step S101 and before step S102, the method further includes: determining a switch signal in the first backlight control signal that is different from the second backlight control signal.
第一图像帧对应的第一背光控制信号中的4个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态为矩阵B=(0,1,0,1),其中矩阵B中的元素按照从左到右的顺序依次表示发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4的开关状态;第二图像帧对应的第二背光控制信号中的4个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态为矩阵A=(1,1,0,0),其中矩阵A中的元素按照从左到右的顺序依次表示发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4的开关状态。通过比较矩阵A以及矩阵B,可以确定第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号,不同的开关信号为发光器件L1对应的开关信号以及发光器件L4对应的开关信号。The switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to the four switching signals in the first backlight control signal corresponding to the first image frame are matrix B=(0,1,0,1), where the elements in matrix B are arranged from left to right. The switching states of the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 are shown in sequence; the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to the four switching signals in the second backlight control signal corresponding to the second image frame are matrix A = (1,1,0,0), where the elements in matrix A represent the switching states of the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 in order from left to right. By comparing matrix A and matrix B, different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal can be determined. The different switching signals are the switching signals corresponding to the light-emitting device L1 and the switching signals corresponding to the light-emitting device L4.
更具体的,可以将第一背光控制信号中的4个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态的矩阵B=(0,1,0,1)中与第二背光控制信号中的4个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态的矩阵A=(1,1,0,0)中的同一个发光器件的开关信号对应的开关状态做异或运算,根据异或运算的结果,确定第一背光控制信号与第二背光控制信号中的同一个发光器件的开关信号是否相同。其中,异或运算的结果为“0”表示相同,异或运算的结果为“1”表示不同。也就是说,矩阵B中的第一个元素“0”与矩阵A中的第一个元素“1”进行异或运算,异或运算的结果为“1”表示第一背光控制信号与第二背光控制信号中发光器件L1对应的开关信号不同;矩阵B中的第二个元素“1”与矩阵A中的第二个元素“1”进行异或运算,异或运算的结果为“0”表示第一背光控制信号与第二背光控制信号中发光器件L2对应的开关信号相同;矩阵B中的第三个元素“0”与矩阵A中的第三个元素“0”进行异或运算,异或运算的结果为“0”表示第一背光控制信号与第二背光控制信号中发光器件L3对应的开关信号相同;矩阵B中的第四个元素“1”与矩阵A中的第四个元素“0”进行异或运算,异或运算的结果为“1”表示第一背光控制信号与第二背光控制信号中发光器件L4对应的开关信号不同。More specifically, the matrix B=(0,1,0,1) of the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to the four switching signals in the first backlight control signal can be combined with the four switching signals in the second backlight control signal. The switching state corresponding to the switching signal of the same light-emitting device in the matrix A=(1,1,0,0) of the corresponding light-emitting device is subjected to an XOR operation, and the first backlight control is determined according to the result of the XOR operation. Whether the switching signal of the same light-emitting device in the signal and the second backlight control signal is the same. Among them, the result of the XOR operation is "0", which means the same, and the result of the XOR operation is "1", which means they are different. That is to say, the first element "0" in matrix B performs an XOR operation with the first element "1" in matrix A. The result of the XOR operation is "1", which means that the first backlight control signal and the second The switching signal corresponding to the light-emitting device L1 in the backlight control signal is different; the second element "1" in matrix B performs an XOR operation with the second element "1" in matrix A, and the result of the XOR operation is "0" It means that the switching signal corresponding to the light-emitting device L2 in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal is the same; the third element "0" in matrix B performs an XOR operation with the third element "0" in matrix A, The result of the XOR operation is "0", which means that the switching signal corresponding to the light-emitting device L3 in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal are the same; the fourth element "1" in matrix B is the same as the fourth element "1" in matrix A. The element "0" performs an XOR operation, and the result of the XOR operation is "1" indicating that the switching signals corresponding to the light-emitting device L4 in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal are different.
由此确定第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号为发光器件L1对应的开关信号以及发光器件L4对应的开关信号,那么,在S102中,就是切换发光器件L1的开关状态,具体是将发光器件L1的开关状态由开启变成关闭,切换发光器件L4的开关状态,具体是将发光器件L4的开关状态由关闭变成开启。It is thus determined that the switch signals in the first backlight control signal that are different from the switch signals in the second backlight control signal are the switch signals corresponding to the light-emitting device L1 and the switch signals corresponding to the light-emitting device L4. Then, in S102, the switch of the light-emitting device L1 is switched. state, specifically changing the switching state of the light-emitting device L1 from on to off, switching the switching state of the light-emitting device L4, specifically changing the switching state of the light-emitting device L4 from off to on.
在另一些实施例中,具体可以是在时钟信号的控制下,同时切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,或者,按照预定顺序切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,预定顺序包括:逐行切换、逐列切换。其中,在时钟信号的控制下,同时切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,使得发光器件L1与发光器件L2对应的开关状态切换,实现发光器件L2和发光器件L4开启,发光器件L1和发光器件L3关闭。或者,在显示设备中的显示面板的切换方式为逐行切换时,例如是按照从上到下的顺序逐行切换时,在时钟信号的控制下,也逐行切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,也就是先切换发光器件L1的开关状态,使得从上往下数第一行中的发光器件L2开启,发光器件L1关闭,再切换发光器件L4的开关状态,使得从上往下数第二行中的发光器件L4开启,发光器件L3关闭。或者,在显示设备中的显示面板的切换方式为逐列切换时,例如是按照从左到右的顺序逐列切换时,在时钟信号的控制下,也逐列切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对 应的发光器件的开关状态,也就是先切换发光器件L1的开关状态,使得从左往右数第一列中的发光器件L1和发光器件L3都关闭,再切换发光器件L4的开关状态,使得从左往右数第二行中的发光器件L2和发光器件L4都开启。也就是说驱动电路驱动切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,可以跟随显示面板的切换方式而变化,实现灯随屏走的效果。In other embodiments, specifically, under the control of a clock signal, the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal can be switched simultaneously, or switching in a predetermined sequence. The switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, the predetermined sequence includes: row-by-row switching and column-by-column switching. Wherein, under the control of the clock signal, the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal are simultaneously switched, so that the switching states corresponding to the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L2 are switched, The light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L4 are turned on, and the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L3 are turned off. Alternatively, when the switching method of the display panel in the display device is row-by-row switching, for example, when switching row by row in order from top to bottom, under the control of the clock signal, the first backlight control signal and the switching mode are also switched row by row. Different switching signals in the second backlight control signal correspond to the switching status of the light-emitting device, that is, first switching the switching status of the light-emitting device L1 so that the light-emitting device L2 in the first row from top to bottom is turned on and the light-emitting device L1 is turned off. Then switch the switching state of the light-emitting device L4 so that the light-emitting device L4 in the second row from top to bottom is turned on and the light-emitting device L3 is turned off. Or when the display panel in the display device switches column by column, for example, when switching column by column in order from left to right, under the control of the clock signal, the first backlight control signal and the switching method are also switched column by column. Different switching signal pairs in the second backlight control signal The corresponding switch state of the light-emitting device, that is, first switch the switch state of the light-emitting device L1 so that the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L3 in the first column from left to right are both turned off, and then switch the switch state of the light-emitting device L4 so that Both the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L4 in the second row from left to right are turned on. That is to say, the driving circuit drives and switches the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, and can change according to the switching mode of the display panel, achieving the effect of the light following the screen.
在另一些实施例中,上述背光控制方法具体可以是指向背光技术中的背光模组使用的背光控制方法。其中,指向背光技术中的图像帧切换方式为左眼图像帧、右眼图像帧、左眼图像帧、右眼图像帧…循环。参照图14所示,其中,该指向背光技术中的背光模组使用的背光控制方法包括:In other embodiments, the above-mentioned backlight control method may specifically be a backlight control method used for backlight modules in backlight technology. Among them, the image frame switching method in the directional backlight technology is left eye image frame, right eye image frame, left eye image frame, right eye image frame... cycle. Referring to Figure 14, the backlight control method used by the backlight module in the directional backlight technology includes:
S201、检测第一观察者的人眼位置,根据第一观察者的人眼位置生成第一背光控制信号。S201. Detect the eye position of the first observer, and generate a first backlight control signal according to the eye position of the first observer.
其中,第一观察者的人眼可以是第一观察者的左眼或者第一观察者的右眼,第一观察者的人眼位置可以是第一观察者的左眼的位置或者第一观察者的右眼的位置,第一观察者的人眼位置由第一观察者的人眼在视场角中的角度、以及第一观察者的人眼与显示设备中的显示面板的距离确定。示例性的,参照图4所示,第一观察者的左眼的位置与发光器件L1和发光器件L2开启、发光器件L3和发光器件L4关闭存在映射关系,那么第一背光控制信号中的4个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态为B=(1,1,0,0)。B=(1,1,0,0)中的元素按照从左到右的顺序依次为发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4的开关状态。Wherein, the human eye of the first observer may be the left eye of the first observer or the right eye of the first observer, and the human eye position of the first observer may be the position of the left eye of the first observer or the first observation The position of the first observer's human eye is determined by the angle of the first observer's human eye in the field of view and the distance between the first observer's human eye and the display panel in the display device. For example, as shown in Figure 4, there is a mapping relationship between the position of the first observer's left eye and the turning on of the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L2, and the turning off of the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4, then 4 in the first backlight control signal The switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to each switching signal is B=(1,1,0,0). The elements in B=(1,1,0,0) are the switching states of the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 in order from left to right.
S202、获取第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号以及第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号。S202. Obtain the first backlight control signal of the first image frame and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame.
其中,S201步骤中生成的第一背光控制信号,为第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号,第一图像帧具体可以是第一观察者的左眼图像帧,随后,还需要获取第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号以及第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号。具体的,第二图像帧为第一图像帧的前一图像帧。在第一图像帧为第一观察者的左眼图像帧时,由于指向背光技术中的图像帧切换方式为左眼图像帧、右眼图像帧、左眼图像帧、右眼图像帧…循环,因此第二图像帧为第一观察者的右眼图像帧。Among them, the first backlight control signal generated in step S201 is the first backlight control signal of the first image frame. The first image frame can specifically be the left eye image frame of the first observer. Subsequently, the first image needs to be acquired. A first backlight control signal for a frame and a second backlight control signal for a second image frame. Specifically, the second image frame is the previous image frame of the first image frame. When the first image frame is the left eye image frame of the first observer, since the image frame switching method in the directional backlight technology is a left eye image frame, a right eye image frame, a left eye image frame, a right eye image frame... in a loop, The second image frame is therefore the right eye image frame of the first observer.
可选的,背光控制方法还包括:确定第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号,第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的就是在相邻两帧图像帧切换时,需要切换开光状态的发光器件。Optionally, the backlight control method further includes: determining a switch signal that is different in the first backlight control signal and a second backlight control signal. The switch signal that is different in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal corresponds to When switching between two adjacent image frames, it is necessary to switch the light-emitting device in the light-on state.
S203、切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态。S203. Switch the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal.
根据第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号,可以将第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态切换,例如将需要切换开关状态的发光器件的开关状态由开启变成关闭,或者将需要切换开关状态的发光器件的开关状态由关闭变成开启。其中,第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号即是在第二图像帧对应的所有发光器件的开关状态的基础上,需要切换开关状态的发光器件,并且,这些需要切换开关状态的发光器件的开关状态切换后,即是第一图像帧对应的所有发光器件的开关状态。According to the different switch signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, the switch state of the light-emitting device corresponding to the different switch signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal can be switched, for example, it is necessary to The switch state of the light-emitting device that switches the switch state changes from on to off, or the switch state of the light-emitting device that needs to switch the switch state changes from off to on. Among them, the switch signals in the first backlight control signal that are different from the switch signals in the second backlight control signal are the light-emitting devices that need to switch the switch state based on the switch states of all the light-emitting devices corresponding to the second image frame, and these needs After the switching state of the light-emitting device that switches the switching state is switched, it is the switching state of all the light-emitting devices corresponding to the first image frame.
示例性的,切换状态往往是在时钟信号的控制下,同时切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,或者,按照预定顺序切换第一背光控制信号中与第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,预定顺序包括:逐行切换、逐列切换。 For example, the switching state is often under the control of a clock signal, switching the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal at the same time, or switching the first backlight control signal in a predetermined order. The switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal, the predetermined sequence includes: row-by-row switching and column-by-column switching.
然后发光器件发光生成光束,该光束传输至显示设备中的光学模组,光学模组改变光束的方向,传输至显示设备中的显示面板。具体的,是第一背光控制信号对应的开关状态为开启的发光器件生成第一光束,第一光束通过显示设备中的光学模组透射至第一观察者的左眼,其中,显示面板接收第一图像帧(也就是第一观察者的左眼图像帧),在第一图像帧的驱动下显示设备中的显示面板显示第一观察者的左眼图像,以使得第一观察者的左眼观看到左眼图像。The light-emitting device then emits light to generate a light beam, which is transmitted to the optical module in the display device. The optical module changes the direction of the light beam and transmits it to the display panel in the display device. Specifically, the light-emitting device whose switch state corresponds to the first backlight control signal is turned on generates the first light beam, and the first light beam is transmitted to the left eye of the first observer through the optical module in the display device, wherein the display panel receives the first light beam. An image frame (that is, the left eye image frame of the first observer). Driven by the first image frame, the display panel in the display device displays the left eye image of the first observer, so that the left eye image of the first observer View the left eye image.
S204、检测第一观察者的人眼位置,根据第一观察者的人眼位置生成第三背光控制信号。S204. Detect the eye position of the first observer, and generate a third backlight control signal according to the eye position of the first observer.
具体的,在显示完第一观察者的左眼图像以后,需要显示第一观察者的右眼图像,其中,第一观察者的人眼可以是第一观察者的左眼或者第一观察者的右眼,第一观察者的人眼位置可以是第一观察者的左眼的位置或者第一观察者的右眼的位置,第一观察者的人眼位置由第一观察者的人眼在视场角中的角度、以及第一观察者的人眼与显示设备中的显示面板的距离确定,在步骤S204中,第一观察者的人眼位置具体是第一观察者的右眼的位置,参照图4所示,第一观察者的右眼的位置与发光器件L3和发光器件L4开启、发光器件L1和发光器件L2关闭存在映射关系,那么第三背光控制信号中的4个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态为B=(0,0,1,1)。B=(0,0,1,1)中的元素按照从左到右的顺序依次为发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4的开关状态。Specifically, after the first observer's left eye image is displayed, the first observer's right eye image needs to be displayed, where the first observer's human eye can be the first observer's left eye or the first observer's The right eye of the first observer, the human eye position of the first observer can be the position of the first observer's left eye or the position of the first observer's right eye, and the human eye position of the first observer is determined by the first observer's human eye position. The angle in the field of view and the distance between the human eye of the first observer and the display panel in the display device are determined. In step S204, the position of the human eye of the first observer is specifically the right eye of the first observer. Position, as shown in Figure 4, there is a mapping relationship between the position of the first observer's right eye and the turning on of the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4, and the turning off of the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L2, then the four switches in the third backlight control signal The switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to the signal is B=(0,0,1,1). The elements in B=(0,0,1,1) are the switching states of the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 in order from left to right.
在一些实施例中,可以是将第一观察者的左眼的位置以及第一观察者的右眼的位置在步骤S201中都检测完成,那么在步骤S204中,只需要根据第一观察者的右眼的位置生成第三背光控制信号即可。本申请的实施例对此不做限定。In some embodiments, the position of the first observer's left eye and the position of the first observer's right eye may be detected in step S201. Then in step S204, it only needs to be based on the position of the first observer's right eye. The third backlight control signal is generated at the position of the right eye. The embodiments of the present application do not limit this.
S205、获取第三图像帧的第三背光控制信号以及第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号。S205. Obtain the third backlight control signal of the third image frame and the first backlight control signal of the first image frame.
在步骤S203显示第一观察者的左眼图像以后,随后就需要显示第一观察者的右眼图像。其中,S204步骤中生成的第三背光控制信号,为第三图像帧的第三背光控制信号,第三图像帧具体是第一观察者的右眼图像帧,且第一观察者的左眼图像帧(第一图像帧)为第一观察者的右眼图像帧(第三图像帧)的前一图像帧,因此,还需要获取第三图像帧的第三背光控制信号以及第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号。After the left eye image of the first observer is displayed in step S203, it is then necessary to display the right eye image of the first observer. Among them, the third backlight control signal generated in step S204 is the third backlight control signal of the third image frame. The third image frame is specifically the right eye image frame of the first observer, and the left eye image of the first observer The frame (first image frame) is the previous image frame of the first observer's right eye image frame (third image frame). Therefore, it is also necessary to obtain the third backlight control signal of the third image frame and the first image frame. The first backlight control signal.
可选的,背光控制方法还包括:确定第三背光控制信号中与第一背光控制信号中不同的开关信号,第三背光控制信号中与第一背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的就是在相邻两帧图像帧切换时,需要切换开光状态的发光器件。Optionally, the backlight control method further includes: determining a switch signal in the third backlight control signal that is different from the first backlight control signal, and the switch signal in the third backlight control signal that is different from the first backlight control signal corresponds to When switching between two adjacent image frames, it is necessary to switch the light-emitting device in the light-on state.
S206、切换第三背光控制信号中与第一背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态。S206. Switch the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to a different switching signal in the first backlight control signal in the third backlight control signal.
根据第三背光控制信号中与第一背光控制信号中不同的开关信号,可以将第三背光控制信号中与第一背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的至少一个发光器件的开关状态切换,例如将需要切换开关状态的发光器件的开关状态由开启变成关闭,或者将需要切换开关状态的发光器件的开关状态由关闭变成开启。其中,第三背光控制信号中与第一背光控制信号中不同的开关信号即是在第一图像帧对应的所有发光器件的开关状态的基础上,需要切换开关状态的发光器件,并且,这些需要切换开关状态的发光器件的开关状态切换后,即是第三图像帧对应的所有发光器件的开关状态。According to the switch signal in the third backlight control signal that is different from the switch signal in the first backlight control signal, the switch state of at least one light-emitting device corresponding to the switch signal in the third backlight control signal that is different from the switch signal in the first backlight control signal can be switched, for example Change the switch state of the light-emitting device that needs to be switched from on to off, or change the switch state of the light-emitting device that needs to be switched from off to on. Among them, the switch signals in the third backlight control signal that are different from the first backlight control signal are the light-emitting devices that need to switch the switch state based on the switch states of all the light-emitting devices corresponding to the first image frame, and these needs After the switching state of the light-emitting device that switches the switching state is switched, it is the switching state of all the light-emitting devices corresponding to the third image frame.
示例性的,切换状态往往是在时钟信号的控制下,同时切换第三背光控制信号中与第一背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,或者,按照预定顺序切换第三背光控制信号中与第一背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态,预定顺 序包括:逐行切换、逐列切换。For example, the switching state is often under the control of a clock signal, switching the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal in the third backlight control signal at the same time, or switching the third backlight control signal in a predetermined order. The switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to the different switching signals in the first backlight control signal in the backlight control signal is predetermined in sequence. The sequence includes: row-by-row switching and column-by-column switching.
然后发光器件发光生成光束,该光束传输至显示设备中的光学模组,光学模组改变光束的方向,传输至显示设备中的显示面板。具体的,第三背光控制信号对应的开关状态为开启的发光器件生成第三光束,第三光束通过显示设备中的光学模组透射至第一观察者的右眼,其中,显示面板接收第三图像帧(也就是第一观察者的右眼图像帧),在第三图像帧的驱动下显示设备中的显示面板显示第一观察者的右眼图像,以使得第一观察者的右眼观看到右眼图像。The light-emitting device then emits light to generate a light beam, which is transmitted to the optical module in the display device. The optical module changes the direction of the light beam and transmits it to the display panel in the display device. Specifically, the switch state corresponding to the third backlight control signal generates a third light beam for the turned-on light-emitting device, and the third light beam is transmitted to the right eye of the first observer through the optical module in the display device, wherein the display panel receives the third light beam. Image frame (that is, the right eye image frame of the first observer), driven by the third image frame, the display panel in the display device displays the right eye image of the first observer, so that the right eye of the first observer watches to the right eye image.
第一观察者在观看到左眼图像与右眼图像时,第一观察者即可观看到3D立体图像。When the first observer views the left eye image and the right eye image, the first observer can view the 3D stereoscopic image.
在另一些实施例中,当需要向不同的两个观察者显示3D图像时,可以按照显示第一个观察者的左眼图像,第一个观察者的右眼图像,第二个观察者的左眼图像,第二个观察者的右眼图像,第一个观察者的左眼图像,第一个观察者的右眼图像,第二个观察者的左眼图像,第二个观察者的右眼图像…依次使得每一个观察者观看到3D图像。这样的背光控制方法与图14所示的背光控制方法一致。不过上述步骤需要重复执行两次,在第一次执行步骤S201-步骤S206时,为第一观察者的左眼图像与第一观察者的右眼图像,在第二次执行步骤S201-步骤S206时,为第二观察者的左眼图像与第二观察者的右眼图像。以此重复。In other embodiments, when it is necessary to display a 3D image to two different observers, the left eye image of the first observer, the right eye image of the first observer, and the second observer's image can be displayed as follows. Left eye image, second observer's right eye image, first observer's left eye image, first observer's right eye image, second observer's left eye image, second observer's The right eye image... in turn enables each observer to view a 3D image. Such a backlight control method is consistent with the backlight control method shown in FIG. 14 . However, the above steps need to be repeated twice. When steps S201 to S206 are executed for the first time, they are the left eye image of the first observer and the right eye image of the first observer. When steps S201 to S206 are executed for the second time, When , it is the left eye image of the second observer and the right eye image of the second observer. Repeat this.
或者,可以按照显示第一个观察者的左眼图像与第二个观察者的左眼图像,第一个观察者的右眼图像与第二个观察者的右眼图像,第一个观察者的左眼图像与第二个观察者的左眼图像,第一个观察者的右眼图像与第二个观察者的右眼图像…使得每一个观察者看到3D图像。Alternatively, one can display the left eye image of the first observer with the left eye image of the second observer, the right eye image of the first observer with the right eye image of the second observer, and the first observer The left eye image of the second observer and the left eye image of the second observer, the right eye image of the first observer and the right eye image of the second observer... make each observer see a 3D image.
则图14所示的S201包括:Then S201 shown in Figure 14 includes:
S201a、检测第一观察者的人眼位置,根据第一观察者的人眼位置生成第一子背光控制信号。S201a. Detect the eye position of the first observer, and generate a first sub-backlight control signal according to the eye position of the first observer.
其中,第一观察者的人眼可以是第一观察者的左眼或者第一观察者的右眼,第一观察者的人眼位置可以是第一观察者的左眼的位置或者第一观察者的右眼的位置,第一观察者的人眼位置由第一观察者的人眼在人眼检测装置的视场角中的角度、以及第一观察者的人眼与显示设备中的显示面板的距离确定。其中,具体是根据第一观察者的左眼位置生成第一子背光控制信号,其中第一个观察者的左眼位置与多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号存在预定的映射关系。示例性的,例如背光模组40中的灯板板上设置有如图4所示的4个发光器件,分别是发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4,其中第一个观察者的左眼e1的位置与发光器件L1和发光器件L2开启、发光器件L3和发光器件L4关闭存在映射关系,那么第一子背光控制信号中的4个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态为B11=(1,1,0,0)。B11=(1,1,0,0)中的元素按照从左到右的顺序依次为发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4的开关状态。Wherein, the human eye of the first observer may be the left eye of the first observer or the right eye of the first observer, and the human eye position of the first observer may be the position of the left eye of the first observer or the first observation The position of the first observer's right eye is determined by the angle between the first observer's human eye in the field of view of the human eye detection device, and the angle between the first observer's human eye and the display in the display device. The distance between panels is determined. Specifically, the first sub-backlight control signal is generated according to the left eye position of the first observer, where there is a predetermined mapping between the left eye position of the first observer and the switching signal corresponding to each light-emitting device in the plurality of light-emitting devices. relation. For example, the light panel in the backlight module 40 is provided with four light-emitting devices as shown in FIG. 4 , namely the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4. The first one is observed There is a mapping relationship between the position of the user's left eye e1 and the turning on of the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L2, and the turning off of the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4. Then the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to the four switching signals in the first sub-backlight control signal is B11=(1,1,0,0). The elements in B11=(1,1,0,0) are the switching states of the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 in order from left to right.
S201b、检测第二观察者的人眼位置,根据第二观察者的人眼位置生成第二子背光控制信号。S201b. Detect the eye position of the second observer, and generate a second sub-backlight control signal according to the eye position of the second observer.
其中,第二观察者的人眼可以是第二观察者的左眼或者第二观察者的右眼,第二观察者的人眼位置可以是第二观察者的左眼位置或者第二观察者的右眼位置,第二观察者的人眼位置由第二观察者的人眼在人眼检测装置的视场角中的角度、以及第二观察者的人眼与显示设备中的显示面板的距离确定。其中,具体是根据第二个观察者的左眼位置生成第二子背光控制信号,其中第二个观察者的左眼位置与多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号存在预定的映射关系。示例性的,例如背光模组40中的灯板上设置有如图4所示的4个发光 器件,分别是发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4,其中第二个观察者的左眼位置与发光器件L2和发光器件L3开启、发光器件L1和发光器件L4关闭存在映射关系,那么第二子背光控制信号中的4个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态为B12=(0,1,1,0)。B12=(0,1,1,0)中的元素按照从左到右的顺序依次为发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4的开关信号。The human eye of the second observer may be the left eye of the second observer or the right eye of the second observer, and the human eye position of the second observer may be the left eye position of the second observer or the right eye of the second observer. The position of the right eye of the second observer is determined by the angle of the second observer's human eye in the field of view of the human eye detection device, and the angle between the second observer's human eye and the display panel in the display device. The distance is determined. Specifically, the second sub-backlight control signal is generated according to the position of the second observer's left eye, where there is a predetermined relationship between the position of the second observer's left eye and the switch signal corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting devices. Mapping relations. For example, the light board in the backlight module 40 is provided with four light-emitting lamps as shown in Figure 4 The devices are respectively the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4. There is a mapping between the position of the second observer's left eye and the turning on of the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L3, and the turning off of the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L4. relationship, then the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to the four switching signals in the second sub-backlight control signal is B12=(0,1,1,0). The elements in B12=(0,1,1,0) are the switching signals of the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 in order from left to right.
S201c、根据第一子背光控制信号与第二子背光控制信号生成第一背光控制信号。S201c. Generate a first backlight control signal according to the first sub-backlight control signal and the second sub-backlight control signal.
具体的,第一子背光控制信号中发光器件L1和发光器件L2开启、发光器件L3和发光器件L4关闭,第二子背光控制信号中发光器件L2和发光器件L3开启、发光器件L1和发光器件L4关闭,因此,第一背光控制信号中,发光器件L1、发光器件L2和发光器件L3开启,发光器件L4关闭。也就是说,第一背光控制信号中的4个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态用矩阵B=(1,1,1,0)表示,B=(1,1,1,0)按照从左到右的顺序依次为发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4的开关状态。Specifically, in the first sub-backlight control signal, the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L2 are turned on, and the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 are turned off. In the second sub-backlight control signal, the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L3 are turned on, and the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device are turned off. L4 is turned off. Therefore, in the first backlight control signal, the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L3 are turned on, and the light-emitting device L4 is turned off. That is to say, the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to the four switching signals in the first backlight control signal are represented by the matrix B=(1,1,1,0), and B=(1,1,1,0) according to The order from left to right is the switching states of the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4.
且图14所示的步骤S204包括:And step S204 shown in Figure 14 includes:
S204a、检测第一观察者的人眼位置,根据第一观察者的人眼位置确定第三子背光控制信号。S204a. Detect the eye position of the first observer, and determine the third sub-backlight control signal according to the eye position of the first observer.
第一观察者的人眼可以是第一观察者的左眼或者第一观察者的右眼,第一观察者的人眼位置可以是第一观察者的左眼的位置或者第一观察者的右眼的位置,由于在步骤S201a中是根据第一观察者的左眼位置生成第一子背光控制信号,那么在步骤S2204中,是根据第一观察者的右眼位置,生成第三子背光控制信号,第三子背光控制信号中的4个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态为B21=(0,1,1,0)。B21=(0,1,1,0)中的元素按照从左到右的顺序依次为发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4的开关状态。The human eye of the first observer may be the left eye of the first observer or the right eye of the first observer, and the position of the human eye of the first observer may be the position of the left eye of the first observer or the position of the first observer's right eye. The position of the right eye, since the first sub-backlight control signal is generated based on the position of the first observer's left eye in step S201a, then in step S2204, the third sub-backlight is generated based on the position of the first observer's right eye. Control signal, the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to the four switching signals in the third sub-backlight control signal is B21=(0,1,1,0). The elements in B21=(0,1,1,0) are the switching states of the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 in order from left to right.
S204b、检测第二观察者的人眼位置,根据第二观察者的人眼位置确定第四子背光控制信号。S204b. Detect the eye position of the second observer, and determine the fourth sub-backlight control signal according to the eye position of the second observer.
第二观察者的人眼可以是第二观察者的左眼或者第二观察者的右眼,第二观察者的人眼位置可以是第二观察者的左眼的位置或者第二观察者的右眼的位置,由于在步骤S201b中是根据第二观察者的左眼位置生成第二子背光控制信号,那么在步骤S204b中,是根据第二观察者的右眼位置,生成第四子背光控制信号,第四子背光控制信号中的4个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态为B22=(0,0,1,1)。B22=(0,0,1,1)中的元素按照从左到右的顺序依次为发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4的开关状态。The human eye of the second observer may be the left eye of the second observer or the right eye of the second observer, and the position of the human eye of the second observer may be the position of the left eye of the second observer or the position of the second observer's right eye. The position of the right eye, since the second sub-backlight control signal is generated based on the position of the second observer's left eye in step S201b, then in step S204b, the fourth sub-backlight is generated based on the position of the second observer's right eye. Control signal, the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to the four switching signals in the fourth sub-backlight control signal is B22=(0,0,1,1). The elements in B22=(0,0,1,1) are the switching states of the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 in order from left to right.
S204c、根据第三子背光控制信号与第四子背光控制信号生成第三背光控制信号。S204c. Generate a third backlight control signal according to the third sub-backlight control signal and the fourth sub-backlight control signal.
具体的,第三子背光控制信号中发光器件L2和发光器件L3开启、发光器件L1和发光器件L4关闭,第四子背光控制信号中发光器件L3和发光器件L4开启、发光器件L1和发光器件L2关闭,因此,第三背光控制信号中,发光器件L2、发光器件L3和发光器件L4开启,发光器件L1关闭。也就是说,第三背光控制信号中的4个开关信号对应的发光器件的开关状态用矩阵C=(0,1,1,1)表示,C=(0,1,1,1)按照从左到右的顺序依次为发光器件L1、发光器件L2、发光器件L3以及发光器件L4的开关状态。Specifically, in the third sub-backlight control signal, the light-emitting device L2 and the light-emitting device L3 are turned on, and the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device L4 are turned off. In the fourth sub-backlight control signal, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 are turned on, and the light-emitting device L1 and the light-emitting device are turned off. L2 is turned off. Therefore, in the third backlight control signal, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4 are turned on, and the light-emitting device L1 is turned off. That is to say, the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to the four switching signals in the third backlight control signal are represented by the matrix C=(0,1,1,1), and C=(0,1,1,1) according to The order from left to right is the switching states of the light-emitting device L1, the light-emitting device L2, the light-emitting device L3 and the light-emitting device L4.
其他的步骤与图14所示的一致。The other steps are the same as shown in Figure 14.
在另一些实施例中,可以将第一图像帧与第二图像帧进行对比,确定显示面板中的至少一个像素组,其中,至少一个像素组中的每一个像素组内,与第一图像帧对应的赋值的像素点和与第二图像帧对应的赋值的像素点之差大于预定值;获取第一背光控制信号,具体包括 获取至少一个像素组中每一个像素组对应的第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号,以及至少一个像素组中每一个像素组对应的第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号。In other embodiments, the first image frame may be compared with the second image frame to determine at least one pixel group in the display panel, wherein each pixel group in the at least one pixel group is different from the first image frame. The difference between the corresponding assigned pixel point and the assigned pixel point corresponding to the second image frame is greater than a predetermined value; obtaining the first backlight control signal, specifically including Obtain the first backlight control signal of the first image frame corresponding to each pixel group in at least one pixel group, and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame corresponding to each pixel group in at least one pixel group.
其中,在显示面板的像素点分为多个像素组时,背光模组中的多个发光器件也分为多组发光器件组,且显示面板中的一个像素组对应背光模组中的一组发光器件组。那么,在一个像素组中,与第一图像帧对应的赋值的像素点的数量和与第二图像帧对应的赋值的像素点的数量之差大于预定值,该预定值可以是该像素组内的总像素点数的10%,也就是32*32*10%≈102,表明当前像素组在显示第一图像帧与显示第二图像帧时,赋值的像素点的数量差异比较大,那么该像素组可能是3D效果突出的一个像素组,可能是3D图中出屏与入屏效果对应的像素组。而其他的像素组中,与第一图像帧对应的赋值的像素点的数量和与第二图像帧对应的赋值的像素点的数量之差小于预定值,表明当前像素组在显示第一图像帧与显示第二图像帧时,赋值的像素点的数量差异不大,3D效果不突出。Among them, when the pixels of the display panel are divided into multiple pixel groups, the multiple light-emitting devices in the backlight module are also divided into multiple light-emitting device groups, and one pixel group in the display panel corresponds to one group in the backlight module. Light emitting device group. Then, in a pixel group, the difference between the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the first image frame and the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the second image frame is greater than a predetermined value, and the predetermined value may be within the pixel group. 10% of the total number of pixels, that is, 32*32*10%≈102, indicating that when the current pixel group displays the first image frame and the second image frame, the difference in the number of assigned pixels is relatively large, then the pixel The group may be a pixel group with outstanding 3D effect, or it may be a pixel group corresponding to the out-of-screen and in-screen effects in the 3D image. In other pixel groups, the difference between the number of assigned pixels corresponding to the first image frame and the number of assigned pixels corresponding to the second image frame is less than a predetermined value, indicating that the current pixel group is displaying the first image frame. Compared with when displaying the second image frame, the number of assigned pixels is not much different, and the 3D effect is not prominent.
其中,预定值可以是该像素组内的总像素点数的10%,或者也可以是该像素组内的总像素点数的20%,例如在显示面板的刷新速率变快时,该百分比将减小,本申请的实施例对预定值不做限定。The predetermined value may be 10% of the total number of pixels in the pixel group, or it may be 20% of the total number of pixels in the pixel group. For example, when the refresh rate of the display panel becomes faster, the percentage will decrease. , the embodiment of the present application does not limit the predetermined value.
那么,确定在当前的显示面板显示第一图像与第二图像时,3D效果突出的像素组以后,获取第一背光控制信号,具体包括获取每一个3D效果突出的像素组对应的发光器件组的第一背光控制信号,以实现在每一次切换背光控制信号时,驱动电路仅需要比较3D图像的效果比较突出的像素组对应的区域内的发光器件的背光控制信号,控制的发光器件的数量将再次减少,控制的效率将再次提升。Then, after determining the pixel group with outstanding 3D effect when the current display panel displays the first image and the second image, the first backlight control signal is obtained, which specifically includes obtaining the light-emitting device group corresponding to each pixel group with outstanding 3D effect. The first backlight control signal is used to realize that every time the backlight control signal is switched, the driving circuit only needs to compare the backlight control signals of the light-emitting devices in the area corresponding to the pixel group with a more prominent effect of the 3D image, and the number of light-emitting devices controlled will be Reduced again, the efficiency of control will increase again.
其中,本申请的实施例提供一种计算机可读存储介质,计算机可读存储介质包括计算机指令,当计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述图13或图14所示的背光控制方法。例如图13或图14中的各个步骤如果以软件功能模块的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一种计算机可读存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的实施例的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)或处理器(processor)执行本申请各个实施例所述的背光控制方法的全部或部分步骤。存储计算机软件产品的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。Among them, embodiments of the present application provide a computer-readable storage medium. The computer-readable storage medium includes computer instructions. When the computer instructions are run on a computer, they cause the computer to execute the backlight control method shown in FIG. 13 or FIG. 14 . For example, if each step in Figure 13 or Figure 14 is implemented in the form of a software function module and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the embodiments of the present application is essentially or contributes to the existing technology, or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a The storage medium includes several instructions to cause a computer device (which can be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) or a processor to execute all or part of the steps of the backlight control method described in various embodiments of the present application. . Storage media for storing computer software products include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk, etc., which can store program code medium.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件程序实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式来实现。该计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机执行指令。在计算机上加载和执行计算机执行指令时,使得计算机执行本申请的实施例所述的背光控制方法。计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。计算机执行指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,计算机执行指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或者数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可以用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带),光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例 如固态硬盘(solid state disk,SSD))等。In the above embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented using a software program, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer-executable instructions. When the computer execution instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the computer is caused to execute the backlight control method described in the embodiments of the present application. The computer may be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. Computer-executable instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another. For example, computer-executable instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center via a wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, microwave, etc.) to another website, computer, server or data center. Computer-readable storage media can be any available media that can be accessed by a computer or include one or more data storage devices such as servers and data centers that can be integrated with the media. Usable media may be magnetic media (e.g., floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (e.g., DVDs), or semiconductor media (e.g., Such as solid state disk (SSD)), etc.
尽管结合具体特征及其实施例对本申请进行了描述,显而易见的,在不脱离本申请的精神和范围的情况下,可对其进行各种修改和组合。相应地,本说明书和附图仅仅是所附权利要求所界定的本申请的示例性说明,且视为已覆盖本申请范围内的任意和所有修改、变化、组合或等同物。显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的精神和范围。这样,倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。 Although the present application has been described in conjunction with specific features and embodiments thereof, it will be apparent that various modifications and combinations may be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the application. Accordingly, the specification and drawings are intended to be merely illustrative of the application as defined by the appended claims and are to be construed to cover any and all modifications, variations, combinations or equivalents within the scope of the application. Obviously, those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the present application without departing from the spirit and scope of the present application. In this way, if these modifications and variations of the present application fall within the scope of the claims of the present application and equivalent technologies, the present application is also intended to include these modifications and variations.

Claims (21)

  1. 一种背光模组,其特征在于,应用于显示设备,所述背光模组包括多个发光器件以及与所述多个发光器件连接的驱动电路;A backlight module, characterized in that it is applied to a display device, and the backlight module includes a plurality of light-emitting devices and a driving circuit connected to the plurality of light-emitting devices;
    所述驱动电路,用于获取第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号,以及第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号,其中,所述第一背光控制信号包括所述多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号,所述第二图像帧为所述第一图像帧的前一图像帧,所述第二背光控制信号包括所述多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号;切换所述第一背光控制信号中与所述第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的所述发光器件的开关状态。The driving circuit is used to obtain a first backlight control signal of the first image frame and a second backlight control signal of the second image frame, wherein the first backlight control signal includes each of the plurality of light-emitting devices. A switch signal corresponding to a light-emitting device, the second image frame is the previous image frame of the first image frame, and the second backlight control signal includes a switch corresponding to each light-emitting device in the plurality of light-emitting devices. Signal; switching the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的背光模组,其特征在于,The backlight module according to claim 1, characterized in that:
    所述第一图像帧为左眼图像帧,所述第一背光控制信号对应的所述开关状态为开启的发光器件生成第一光束,所述第一光束透射至左眼;所述第二图像帧为右眼图像帧,所述第二背光控制信号对应的所述开关状态为开启的发光器件生成第二光束,所述第二光束透射至右眼;The first image frame is a left-eye image frame, and the light-emitting device corresponding to the switch state of the first backlight control signal is turned on to generate a first light beam, and the first light beam is transmitted to the left eye; the second image The frame is a right-eye image frame, and the light-emitting device corresponding to the switch state of the second backlight control signal is turned on to generate a second light beam, and the second light beam is transmitted to the right eye;
    或者,or,
    所述第一图像帧为右眼图像帧,所述第一背光控制信号对应的所述开关状态为开启的发光器件生成第一光束,所述第一光束透射至右眼;所述第二图像帧为左眼图像帧,所述第二背光控制信号对应的所述开关状态为开启的发光器件生成第二光束,所述第二光束透射至左眼。The first image frame is a right-eye image frame, the light-emitting device corresponding to the switch state of the first backlight control signal is turned on and generates a first light beam, and the first light beam is transmitted to the right eye; the second image The frame is a left-eye image frame, and the light-emitting device whose switch state corresponds to the second backlight control signal is turned on generates a second light beam, and the second light beam is transmitted to the left eye.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的背光模组,其特征在于,The backlight module according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that:
    所述驱动电路,还用于在缓存中读取所述第二背光控制信号。The driving circuit is also used to read the second backlight control signal in the cache.
  4. 根据权利要求1-3任一项所述的背光模组,其特征在于,The backlight module according to any one of claims 1-3, characterized in that:
    所述驱动电路,具体用于在时钟信号的控制下,同时切换所述第一背光控制信号中与所述第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的所述发光器件的开关状态,或者,按照预定顺序切换所述第一背光控制信号中与所述第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的所述发光器件的开关状态,所述预定顺序包括:逐行切换、逐列切换。The driving circuit is specifically configured to simultaneously switch the switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal under the control of a clock signal, or, The switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the second backlight control signal in the first backlight control signal are switched according to a predetermined sequence, where the predetermined sequence includes: row-by-row switching and column-by-column switching.
  5. 根据权利要求1-4任一项所述的背光模组,其特征在于,The backlight module according to any one of claims 1-4, characterized in that:
    所述驱动电路,还用于确定所述第一背光控制信号中与所述第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号。The driving circuit is also used to determine a switch signal in the first backlight control signal that is different from the second backlight control signal.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的背光模组,其特征在于,The backlight module according to claim 5, characterized in that:
    所述驱动电路,具体用于将所述第一背光控制信号与所述第二背光控制信号中的同一个发光器件的开关信号对应的开关状态做异或运算;The driving circuit is specifically configured to perform an XOR operation on the switching state corresponding to the switching signal of the same light-emitting device in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal;
    根据所述异或运算的结果,确定所述第一背光控制信号与所述第二背光控制信号中的所述同一个发光器件的开关信号是否相同。According to the result of the XOR operation, it is determined whether the switching signal of the same light-emitting device in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal is the same.
  7. 一种显示设备,其特征在于,包括显示面板以及如权利要求1-6任一项所述的背光模组,所述背光模组中的发光器件生成光束传输至所述显示面板,以使得所述第一图像帧驱动所述显示面板显示图像。A display device, characterized in that it includes a display panel and a backlight module according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein a light-emitting device in the backlight module generates a light beam and transmits it to the display panel, so that the The first image frame drives the display panel to display an image.
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的显示设备,其特征在于,所述显示设备还包括:位于所述背光模组与所述显示面板之间的光学模组;The display device according to claim 7, wherein the display device further comprises: an optical module located between the backlight module and the display panel;
    所述光学模组用于将所述背光模组中的发光器件生成的对应所述第一背光控制信号的光 束通过所述显示面板透射至左眼,将所述背光模组中的发光器件生成的对应所述第二背光控制信号的光束通过所述显示面板透射至右眼;The optical module is used to convert light corresponding to the first backlight control signal generated by the light-emitting device in the backlight module. The beam is transmitted to the left eye through the display panel, and the light beam corresponding to the second backlight control signal generated by the light-emitting device in the backlight module is transmitted to the right eye through the display panel;
    或者;or;
    所述光学模组用于将所述背光模组中的发光器件生成的对应所述第一背光控制信号的光束通过所述显示面板透射至右眼,将所述背光模组中的发光器件生成的对应所述第二背光控制信号的光束通过所述显示面板透射至左眼。The optical module is used to transmit the light beam corresponding to the first backlight control signal generated by the light-emitting device in the backlight module to the right eye through the display panel, and generate the light beam generated by the light-emitting device in the backlight module. The light beam corresponding to the second backlight control signal is transmitted to the left eye through the display panel.
  9. 根据权利要求7或8所述的显示设备,其特征在于,所述显示设备还包括人眼检测装置,所述人眼检测装置具有视场角;The display device according to claim 7 or 8, characterized in that the display device further includes a human eye detection device, and the human eye detection device has a field of view;
    所述人眼检测装置,用于检测第一观察者的人眼位置,根据所述第一观察者的人眼位置生成所述第一背光控制信号,第一观察者的人眼为第一观察者的左眼或右眼,所述第一观察者的人眼位置由所述第一观察者的人眼在所述视场角中的角度、以及所述第一观察者的人眼与所述显示面板的距离确定。The human eye detection device is used to detect the human eye position of the first observer, and generate the first backlight control signal according to the human eye position of the first observer, and the human eye of the first observer is the first observer. The left eye or right eye of the first observer, the position of the human eye of the first observer is determined by the angle of the human eye of the first observer in the field of view, and the relationship between the human eye of the first observer and the human eye of the first observer. The distance between the display panels is determined.
  10. 根据权利要求7或8所述的显示设备,其特征在于,所述显示设备还包括人眼检测装置,所述人眼检测装置具有视场角;The display device according to claim 7 or 8, characterized in that the display device further includes a human eye detection device, and the human eye detection device has a field of view;
    所述人眼检测装置,用于检测第一观察者的人眼位置,根据所述第一观察者的人眼位置生成第一子背光控制信号,第一观察者的人眼为第一观察者的左眼或右眼,所述第一观察者的人眼位置由所述第一观察者的人眼在所述视场角中的角度、以及所述第一观察者的人眼与所述显示面板的距离确定;The human eye detection device is used to detect the human eye position of the first observer, and generate the first sub-backlight control signal according to the human eye position of the first observer, and the human eye of the first observer is the first observer. The left or right eye of the first observer, the position of the human eye of the first observer is determined by the angle of the human eye of the first observer in the field of view, and the relationship between the human eye of the first observer and the The distance between the display panels is determined;
    所述人眼检测装置,还用于检测第二观察者的人眼位置,根据所述第二观察者的人眼位置生成第二子背光控制信号,第二观察者的人眼为第二观察者的左眼或右眼,所述第二观察者的人眼位置由所述第二观察者的人眼在所述视场角中的角度、以及所述第二观察者的人眼与所述显示面板的距离确定;The human eye detection device is also used to detect the human eye position of the second observer, and generate a second sub-backlight control signal according to the human eye position of the second observer, and the human eye of the second observer is the second observation The left eye or right eye of the second observer, the position of the human eye of the second observer is determined by the angle of the human eye of the second observer in the field of view, and the relationship between the human eye of the second observer and the human eye of the second observer. The distance between the above display panels is determined;
    所述人眼检测装置,还用于根据所述第一子背光控制信号与所述第二子背光控制信号生成所述第一背光控制信号。The human eye detection device is further configured to generate the first backlight control signal according to the first sub-backlight control signal and the second sub-backlight control signal.
  11. 根据权利要求7或8所述的显示设备,其特征在于,所述显示设备还包括控制电路,所述控制电路与所述显示面板连接,所述控制电路与所述背光模组中的驱动电路连接;The display device according to claim 7 or 8, characterized in that, the display device further includes a control circuit, the control circuit is connected to the display panel, and the control circuit is connected to a driving circuit in the backlight module. connect;
    所述控制电路用于将所述第一图像帧与所述第二图像帧进行对比,确定所述显示面板中的至少一个像素组,其中,所述至少一个像素组中的每一个像素组内,与所述第一图像帧对应的赋值的像素点的数量和与所述第二图像帧对应的赋值的像素点的数量之差大于预定值;还用于获取所述至少一个像素组中每一个像素组对应的所述第一背光控制信号。The control circuit is used to compare the first image frame with the second image frame and determine at least one pixel group in the display panel, wherein each pixel group in the at least one pixel group , the difference between the number of assigned pixels corresponding to the first image frame and the number of assigned pixels corresponding to the second image frame is greater than a predetermined value; and is also used to obtain each of the at least one pixel group. The first backlight control signal corresponds to one pixel group.
  12. 一种背光控制方法,其特征在于,应用于显示设备,所述显示设备包括背光模组,所述背光模组包括多个发光器件;A backlight control method, characterized in that it is applied to a display device, the display device includes a backlight module, and the backlight module includes a plurality of light-emitting devices;
    所述方法包括:The methods include:
    获取第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号,以及第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号,其中,所述第一背光控制信号包括所述多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号;所述第二图像帧为所述第一图像帧的前一图像帧,所述第二背光控制信号包括所述多个发光器件中的每一个发光器件对应的开关信号;Obtaining a first backlight control signal of the first image frame and a second backlight control signal of the second image frame, wherein the first backlight control signal includes a switching signal corresponding to each light-emitting device in the plurality of light-emitting devices. ; The second image frame is the previous image frame of the first image frame, and the second backlight control signal includes a switching signal corresponding to each light-emitting device in the plurality of light-emitting devices;
    切换所述第一背光控制信号中与所述第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的所述发光器件的开关状态。Switching the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的背光控制方法,其特征在于, The backlight control method according to claim 12, characterized in that:
    所述第一图像帧为左眼图像帧,所述第一背光控制信号对应的所述开关状态为开启的发光器件生成第一光束,所述第一光束透射至左眼;所述第二图像帧为右眼图像帧,所述第二背光控制信号对应的所述开关状态为开启的发光器件生成第二光束,所述第二光束透射至右眼;The first image frame is a left-eye image frame, and the light-emitting device corresponding to the switch state of the first backlight control signal is turned on to generate a first light beam, and the first light beam is transmitted to the left eye; the second image The frame is a right-eye image frame, and the light-emitting device corresponding to the switch state of the second backlight control signal is turned on to generate a second light beam, and the second light beam is transmitted to the right eye;
    或者,or,
    所述第一图像帧为右眼图像帧,所述第一背光控制信号对应的所述开关状态为开启的发光器件生成第一光束,所述第一光束透射至右眼;所述第二图像帧为左眼图像帧,所述第二背光控制信号对应的所述开关状态为开启的发光器件生成第二光束,所述第二光束透射至左眼。The first image frame is a right-eye image frame, the light-emitting device corresponding to the switch state of the first backlight control signal is turned on and generates a first light beam, and the first light beam is transmitted to the right eye; the second image The frame is a left-eye image frame, and the light-emitting device whose switch state corresponds to the second backlight control signal is turned on generates a second light beam, and the second light beam is transmitted to the left eye.
  14. 根据权利要求12或13所述的背光控制方法,其特征在于,The backlight control method according to claim 12 or 13, characterized in that:
    所述获取第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号,以及第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号,之前,还包括:Before obtaining the first backlight control signal of the first image frame and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame, it also includes:
    检测第一观察者的人眼位置,根据所述第一观察者的人眼位置生成所述第一背光控制信号,第一观察者的人眼为第一观察者的左眼或右眼,所述第一观察者的人眼位置由所述第一观察者的人眼在视场角中的角度、以及所述第一观察者的人眼与所述显示设备中的显示面板的距离确定,其中,所述视场角为所述显示设备中的人眼检测装置的视场角。Detect the eye position of the first observer, and generate the first backlight control signal according to the eye position of the first observer. The human eye of the first observer is the left eye or the right eye of the first observer, so The position of the first observer's eyes is determined by the angle of the first observer's eyes in the field of view and the distance between the first observer's eyes and the display panel in the display device, Wherein, the field of view angle is the field of view angle of the human eye detection device in the display device.
  15. 根据权利要求12或13所述的背光控制方法,其特征在于,The backlight control method according to claim 12 or 13, characterized in that:
    所述获取第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号,以及第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号,之前,还包括:Before obtaining the first backlight control signal of the first image frame and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame, it also includes:
    检测第一观察者的人眼位置,根据所述第一观察者的人眼位置生成第一子背光控制信号,第一观察者的人眼为第一观察者的左眼或右眼,所述第一观察者的人眼位置由所述第一观察者的人眼在视场角中的角度、以及所述第一观察者的人眼与所述显示设备中的显示面板的距离确定,其中,所述视场角为所述显示设备中的人眼检测装置的视场角;Detecting the eye position of the first observer, and generating the first sub-backlight control signal according to the eye position of the first observer, where the human eye of the first observer is the left eye or the right eye of the first observer, the The position of the first observer's eyes is determined by the angle of the first observer's eyes in the field of view and the distance between the first observer's eyes and the display panel in the display device, where , the field of view angle is the field of view angle of the human eye detection device in the display device;
    检测第二观察者的人眼位置,根据所述第二观察者的人眼位置生成第二子背光控制信号,第二观察者的人眼为第二观察者的左眼或右眼,所述第二观察者的人眼位置由所述第二观察者的人眼在所述视场角中的角度、以及所述第二观察者的人眼与所述显示设备中的显示面板的距离确定;Detecting the eye position of the second observer, and generating a second sub-backlight control signal according to the eye position of the second observer, where the human eye of the second observer is the left eye or the right eye of the second observer, the The position of the second observer's eyes is determined by the angle of the second observer's eyes in the field of view and the distance between the second observer's eyes and the display panel in the display device. ;
    根据所述第一子背光控制信号与所述第二子背光控制信号生成所述第一背光控制信号。The first backlight control signal is generated according to the first sub-backlight control signal and the second sub-backlight control signal.
  16. 根据权利要求12或13所述的背光控制方法,其特征在于,The backlight control method according to claim 12 or 13, characterized in that:
    所述获取第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号,以及第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号,之前,还包括:将所述第一图像帧与所述第二图像帧进行对比,确定所述显示设备中的显示面板中的至少一个像素组,其中,所述至少一个像素组中的每一个像素组内,与第一图像帧对应的赋值的像素点的数量和与第二图像帧对应的赋值的像素点的数量之差大于预定值;Before obtaining the first backlight control signal of the first image frame and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame, it further includes: comparing the first image frame with the second image frame, determining the At least one pixel group in the display panel in the display device, wherein in each pixel group in the at least one pixel group, the sum of the number of assigned pixel points corresponding to the first image frame corresponds to the second image frame The difference in the number of assigned pixels is greater than the predetermined value;
    所述获取第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号,以及第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号,具体包括获取所述至少一个像素组中每一个像素组对应的所述第一图像帧的所述第一背光控制信号,以及所述至少一个像素组中每一个像素组对应的所述第二图像帧的所述第二背光控制信号。The obtaining of the first backlight control signal of the first image frame and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame specifically includes obtaining all of the first image frame corresponding to each pixel group in the at least one pixel group. The first backlight control signal, and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame corresponding to each pixel group in the at least one pixel group.
  17. 根据权利要求12-16任一项所述的背光控制方法,其特征在于,The backlight control method according to any one of claims 12 to 16, characterized in that:
    所述获取第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号,以及第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号之前,还包括: Before obtaining the first backlight control signal of the first image frame and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame, the method further includes:
    在缓存中读取所述第二背光控制信号。The second backlight control signal is read in the cache.
  18. 根据权利要求12-17任一项所述的背光控制方法,其特征在于,The backlight control method according to any one of claims 12 to 17, characterized in that:
    所述切换所述第一背光控制信号中与所述第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的所述发光器件的开关状态,具体包括:Switching the switching state of the light-emitting device corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal specifically includes:
    在时钟信号的控制下,同时切换所述第一背光控制信号中与所述第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的所述发光器件的开关状态,或者,按照预定顺序切换所述第一背光控制信号中与所述第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号对应的所述发光器件的开关状态,所述预定顺序包括:逐行切换、逐列切换。Under the control of a clock signal, switching states of the light-emitting devices corresponding to different switching signals in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal are simultaneously switched, or the first backlight control signal is switched in a predetermined sequence. The switching states of the light-emitting devices in the backlight control signal correspond to different switching signals in the second backlight control signal, and the predetermined sequence includes: row-by-row switching and column-by-column switching.
  19. 根据权利要求12-18任一项所述的背光控制方法,其特征在于,The backlight control method according to any one of claims 12 to 18, characterized in that:
    所述获取第一图像帧的第一背光控制信号,以及第二图像帧的第二背光控制信号之后,还包括:After obtaining the first backlight control signal of the first image frame and the second backlight control signal of the second image frame, the method further includes:
    确定所述第一背光控制信号中与所述第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号。A switch signal in the first backlight control signal that is different from the second backlight control signal is determined.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的背光控制方法,其特征在于,The backlight control method according to claim 19, characterized in that:
    所述确定所述第一背光控制信号中与所述第二背光控制信号中不同的开关信号,具体包括:Determining the switch signal in the first backlight control signal that is different from the second backlight control signal specifically includes:
    将所述第一背光控制信号与所述第二背光控制信号中的同一个发光器件的开关信号对应的开关状态做异或运算;Perform an XOR operation on the switching state corresponding to the switching signal of the same light-emitting device in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal;
    根据所述异或运算的结果,确定所述第一背光控制信号与所述第二背光控制信号中的所述同一个发光器件的开关信号是否相同。According to the result of the XOR operation, it is determined whether the switching signal of the same light-emitting device in the first backlight control signal and the second backlight control signal is the same.
  21. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求12-20任一项所述的背光控制方法。 A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that the computer-readable storage medium includes computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are run on a computer, the computer is caused to execute as described in any one of claims 12-20 backlight control method.
PCT/CN2023/093002 2022-07-27 2023-05-09 Backlight module, display device, and backlight control method WO2024021755A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202210896066.8 2022-07-27
CN202210896066.8A CN117518587A (en) 2022-07-27 2022-07-27 Backlight module, display equipment and backlight control method

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024021755A1 true WO2024021755A1 (en) 2024-02-01

Family

ID=89705222

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/093002 WO2024021755A1 (en) 2022-07-27 2023-05-09 Backlight module, display device, and backlight control method

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN117518587A (en)
WO (1) WO2024021755A1 (en)

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR20080015598A (en) * 2006-08-16 2008-02-20 엘지.필립스 엘시디 주식회사 A display deivce and a method for driving the same
CN102572476A (en) * 2011-12-19 2012-07-11 四川长虹电器股份有限公司 Device and method for eliminating crosstalk and ghosting phenomena
CN103050098A (en) * 2011-10-17 2013-04-17 鸿富锦精密工业(深圳)有限公司 Backlight control system and backlight control method thereof
CN104200781A (en) * 2014-08-28 2014-12-10 青岛海信电器股份有限公司 Method and device for controlling backlight during entering or quitting wide-screen film display mode
CN104240678A (en) * 2013-06-17 2014-12-24 华为终端有限公司 Method, device and terminal for adjusting screen backlight brightness
CN107993616A (en) * 2017-12-27 2018-05-04 武汉华星光电技术有限公司 A kind of method for displaying image and device

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR20080015598A (en) * 2006-08-16 2008-02-20 엘지.필립스 엘시디 주식회사 A display deivce and a method for driving the same
CN103050098A (en) * 2011-10-17 2013-04-17 鸿富锦精密工业(深圳)有限公司 Backlight control system and backlight control method thereof
CN102572476A (en) * 2011-12-19 2012-07-11 四川长虹电器股份有限公司 Device and method for eliminating crosstalk and ghosting phenomena
CN104240678A (en) * 2013-06-17 2014-12-24 华为终端有限公司 Method, device and terminal for adjusting screen backlight brightness
CN104200781A (en) * 2014-08-28 2014-12-10 青岛海信电器股份有限公司 Method and device for controlling backlight during entering or quitting wide-screen film display mode
CN107993616A (en) * 2017-12-27 2018-05-04 武汉华星光电技术有限公司 A kind of method for displaying image and device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN117518587A (en) 2024-02-06

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US10951875B2 (en) Display processing circuitry
CN107924059B (en) Displaying binocular overlaid images in head mounted display
US9726887B2 (en) Imaging structure color conversion
TWI587008B (en) Imaging structure with embedded light sources
US9412336B2 (en) Dynamic backlight control for spatially independent display regions
WO2019218742A1 (en) Liquid crystal display device and control method therefor, head-mounted display device, and medium
US10419746B2 (en) 3D display apparatus and 3D display method
US20110050861A1 (en) Stereoscopic image display device and stereoscopic image display method
CN105359540A (en) Dual duty cycle OLED to enable dynamic control for reduced motion blur control with constant brightness in augmented reality experiences
WO2015116217A1 (en) Camera included in display
TWI786595B (en) Systems and methods of enhancing quality of multiview images using a multimode display
US20090315883A1 (en) Autostereoscopic display with pixelated luminaire
TWI312639B (en) Method and apparatus for stereoscopic display employing an array of pixels each employing an organic light emitting diode
TWI363192B (en) Stereo-image displaying apparatus and method for reducing stereo-image cross-talk
KR102155703B1 (en) Display apparatus
KR20070056051A (en) Method and apparatus for led based display
WO2011001372A1 (en) Directional display system
US9626924B2 (en) Display auxiliary device, display system, display method, and program medium
KR100614202B1 (en) A Three-dimensional Volumetric Display Device Using Rotation Of Light-Emitting Plates
CN108564923B (en) High dynamic contrast image display method and device based on partition backlight
US9257070B2 (en) Image display method and display system
WO2024021755A1 (en) Backlight module, display device, and backlight control method
KR20190016831A (en) Display device and controlling method for the same
US11348514B2 (en) LED-based display apparatus and method incorporating sub-pixel shifting
US10529276B2 (en) Apparatus, systems, and methods for preventing display flicker

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23844970

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1